DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL - Prime Construction Group, Inc. · DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL . 15041-1 ......

DIVISION 15

MECHANICAL

15041-1

SECTION 15041

DISINFECTION OF PIPING AND STRUCTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01. DESCRIPTION

This section includes materials and procedures for disinfection of water mains by the continuous feed method and disinfection of structures. Do not use the tablet method to disinfect pipelines. Disinfect piping in accordance with AWWA C651 and disinfect structures in accordance with AWWA C652, except as modified below. Disinfection of piping and structures shall meet the requirements of the County and FDEP. Disinfection of the new well shall be done in accordance with Specification Section 11213 Vertical Turbine Well Pumps.

1.02. JOB CONDITIONS

A. Discharge of chlorinated water into watercourses or surface waters is regulated by the National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES). Apply to cognizant environmental regulation authority, Florida Department of Environmental Protection and obtain permit, for permission to discharge. Disposal of the chlorinated disinfection water and the flushing water is the Contractor's responsibility.

B. Schedule the rate of flow and locations of discharges in advance to permit review and coordination with Owner and cognizant regulatory authorities.

C. Use potable water for chlorination.

D. Submit request for use of water from waterlines of Owner 48 hours in advance. 1.03. SUBMITTALS

A. Copies of all laboratory test results. B. Copies of all FDEP correspondence. C. Sampling location drawing.

D. Contractor shall submit a disinfection plan outlining proposed schedule,

disinfection procedures, sample locations, test facility locations, and discharge plan for review and approval by the County. Disinfection plan shall comply with AWWA standards, FDEP rules, and the FDEP permit. Plan shall be submitted and approved prior to disinfection.

15041-2

E. Provide As-Built Drawings per Section 01720 prior to disinfection

PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.01. LIQUID CHLORINE

Inject with a solution feed chlorinator and a water booster pump. Use an experienced operator and follow the instructions of the chlorinator manufacturer.

2.02. CALCIUM HYPOCHLORITE (DRY)

Dissolve in water to a known concentration in a drum and pump into the pipeline at a metered rate.

2.03. SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE (SOLUTION)

Further dilute in water to desired concentration and pump into the pipeline at a metered rate.

2.04. CHLORINE RESIDUAL TEST KIT

For measuring chlorine concentration, supply and use a DPD Colorimetric method comparator with wide range color discs. Range 1.0 to 50 mg/l. Products: Hach Chemical or Hellige. Maintain kits in good working order available for immediate test of residuals at point of sampling.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01. PIPELINE FLUSHING (PRE-FLUSH)

All pipelines shall be flushed clean of deleterious material prior to disinfection.

3.02. CONTINUOUS FEED METHOD FOR PIPELINES

Introduce potable water into the pipeline at a constant measured rate. Feed the chlorine solution into the same water at a measured rate. Proportion the two rates so that the chlorine concentration in the pipeline is maintained at a minimum concentration of 50 mg/l. Check the concentration at points downstream during the filling to ascertain that sufficient chlorine is being added.

3.03. DISINFECTION OF VALVES AND APPURTENANCES

During the period that the chlorine solution is in the section of pipeline, open and close valves to obtain a chlorine residual at hydrants and other pipeline appurtenances. Valves connected to the existing water system shall be manipulated by the County.

15041-3

3.04. DISINFECTION OF CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING PIPELINES

Disinfect per AWWA C651, Section 9. Flush with potable water until discolored water, mud, and debris are eliminated. Swab interior of pipe and fittings with a 1% sodium hypochlorite solution. After disinfection, flush with potable water again until water is free of chlorine odor.

3.05. CONFIRMATION OF RESIDUAL (POST FLUSH)

After the chlorine solution applied by the continuous feed method has been retained in the pipeline for 24 hours, confirm that a chlorine residual of 25 mg/l minimum exists along the pipeline by sampling at air valves and other points of access.

3.06. PIPELINE FLUSHING

After confirming the chlorine residual, flush the excess chlorine solution from the pipeline until the chlorine concentration in the water leaving the pipe is within 0.5 mg/l of the replacement water.

3.07. BACTERIOLOGIC TESTS

The County Inspector will collect one sample per day at each sample point on two consecutive days, and deliver to the County laboratory, and obtain a bacteriologic quality test to demonstrate the absence of coliform organisms in each separate section of the pipeline and in each structure after chlorination and refilling. Distance between samples shall be in accordance with the FDEP regulations and permit. Test between all valves in each direction. At each connection to an existing pipeline, take two additional samples. Sample locations shall be shown on the drawings provided in the disinfection plan and for FDEP submittals.

3.08. REPETITION OF PROCEDURE

If the initial chlorination fails to produce required residuals and bacteriologic tests, repeat the chlorination and retesting until satisfactory results are obtained.

3.09. TEST FACILITY REMOVAL

After satisfactory disinfection, replace air valves, restore the pipe coating, and complete the pipeline where temporary disinfection or test facilities were installed. Any test station removed prior to receipt of acceptable lab results will be required to be replaced at the Contractor’s expense should retesting be required.

15041-4

3.10. PIPING TO BE DISINFECTED

1. Disinfect all piping as indicated on the Piping Schedule in the drawings per AWWA.

2. Disinfect (internally and externally) any piping inside the following structures: a. Ground Storage Tank

3.11. DISINFECTION OF STRUCTURES

1. Disinfect per AWWA C652, Method 2. 2. Disinfect the interior of the following structures: a. Ground Storage Tank No. 1 and No. 2

3. Remove any chlorine solution which accumulates in the bottom of the structure each

day. 4. The Owner will provide potable water at no cost to the Contractor for the first

disinfection effort. If bacteriological testing shows that the first disinfection effort was not successful, the Contractor will be charged the cost of additional water at the Owner's current rates.

END OF SECTION

15044-1

SECTION 15044

PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Scope of Work: This section specifies the leakage testing requirements for plant piping.

B. Related Work Described Elsewhere: 1. Section 15062: Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings. 2. Section 15064: Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings. 3. Section 15070: Schedule 80 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, Fittings and

Valves. 3. Section 15090: Chemical Feed System Piping. C. General Design (not applicable)

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test Pressures: Test pressures for the various services and types of piping shall be

as shown in Table 15044-A and at a minimum shall be 1.5 times the working pressure.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Materials and Shop Drawings (Not Applicable) B. Additional Information: 1. Testing Plan: Submit prior to testing and include at least the information

that follows: a. Testing dates. b. Piping systems and section(s) to be tested. c. Test type. d. Method of isolation.

15044-2

e. Calculation of maximum allowable leakage for piping section(s) to be tested.

2. Certifications of Calibration: Testing equipment. 3. Certified Test Report. 4. Testing Records:

a. Provide a record of each piping installation during the testing. These records shall include:

i. Date of test. ii. Identification of pipeline tested or retested. iii. Identification of pipeline material. iv. Identification of pipe specification. v. Test fluid. vi. Test pressure. vii. Remarks: Leaks identified (type and location), types of

repairs, or corrections made. viii. Certification by Contractor that the leakage rate measured

conformed to the specifications. ix. Signature of Owner's representative witnessing pipe test.

b. Submit five (5) copies of the test records to the Engineer's representative upon completion of the testing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Testing fluid shall be clean water for all piping except air service and shall be of

such quality to prevent corrosion of materials in piping system for all hydrostatic tests. Air piping shall be tested using compressed air.

15044-3

2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Provide pressure gauges, necessary bracing and restraint, test plugs, pipes,

bulkheads, pumps, and meters to perform the hydrostatic and pneumatic testing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Pipes shall be in place and anchored before commencing pressure testing. B. Conduct hydrostatic and pneumatic tests on exposed and aboveground piping after

the piping has been installed and attached to the pipe supports, hangers, anchors, expansion joints, valves, and meters.

C. Before conducting hydrostatic tests, flush pipes with water to remove dirt and

debris. For pneumatic tests, blow air through the pipes. D. Test new pipelines which are to be connected to existing pipelines by isolating the

new line from the existing line by means of pipe caps, special flanges, or blind flanges. After the new line has been successfully tested, remove caps or flanges and connect to the existing piping.

E. Conduct hydrostatic tests on buried pipe after the trench has been completely

backfilled. The pipe may be partially backfilled and the joints left exposed for inspection for an initial leakage test. Perform the final test, however, after completely backfilling and compacting the trench.

F. Chlorine Piping: Test, dry, and clean in accordance with requirements of

Chlorine Institute Pamphlet 6. G. New Piping Connected to Existing Piping: Isolate new piping with grooved-end

pipe caps, spectacle blinds, blind flanges, or as acceptable to ENGINEER. H. Items that do not require testing include: Piping between wet wells and wet well

isolation valves, equipment seal drains, tank overflows to atmospheric vented drains, and tank atmospheric vents.

I. Gravity Piping: 1. Perform testing after service connections, manholes, and backfilling have

been completed between stations to be tested.

15044-4

2. Determine groundwater level at time of testing by exploratory holes or other method acceptable to ENGINEER.

J. Pressure Test: 1. All tests shall be made in the presence of and to the satisfaction of the

Owner or Engineer and also, to the satisfaction of any local or state inspector having jurisdiction.

a. Provide not less than three (3) days notice to the Owner, Engineer,

and the authority having jurisdiction when it is proposed to make the tests.

b. Any piping or equipment that has been left unprotected and subject

to mechanical or other injury in the opinion of the Engineer shall be retested in part or in whole as directed by the Engineer.

c. The piping systems may be tested in sections as the work

progresses, but no joint or portion of the system shall be left untested.

2. All elements within the system that may be damaged by the testing

operation shall be removed or otherwise protected during the operation. 3. Repair all damage done to existing or adjacent work or materials due to or

on account of the tests. 3.02 INSTALLATION (Not Applicable) 3.03 INSPECTION AND TESTING

A. Hydrostatic Testing of Aboveground or Exposed Piping: The maximum filling velocity shall be 0.25 feet per second, applied over full area of pipe. Open vents at high points of the piping system to purge air while the pipe is being filled. Subject the piping system to the test pressure indicated. Maintain the test pressure for a minimum of four (4) hours. Examine joints, fittings, valves, and connections for leaks. The piping system shall show no leakage or weeping. Correct leaks and retest until no leakage is obtained.

B. Hydrostatic Testing of Buried Piping:

1. Test after backfilling has been completed. Expel air from piping system during filling.

15044-5

2. Where any section of the piping contains concrete thrust blocks or encasement, do not make the pressure test until at least 10 days after the concrete has been poured. When testing mortar-lined piping, fill the pipe to be tested with water and allow it to soak for at least 48 hours to absorb water before conducting the pressure test.

3. Apply and maintain the test pressure by means of a hydraulic force pump.

Maintain the test pressure for a minimum duration of four (4) hours. After the test pressure is reached, use a meter to measure the additional water added to maintain the pressure during the four hours. This amount of water is the loss due to leakage in the piping system. The allowable leakage rate is defined by the formula.

L = SD(P)1/2 148,000

in which: L = allowable leakage (gallons/hour) during the test period. S = length of pipe, in feet D = nominal diameter of the pipe (inches) P = average test pressure during leakage test (psig)

3. Repair and retest any pipes showing leakage rates greater than that

allowed. C. Pneumatic Test For Pressure Piping: 1. Do not perform on PVC or CPVC pipe. 2. Fluid: Oil-free, dry air. 3. Procedure: a. Apply preliminary pneumatic test pressure of 25 psig maximum to

piping system prior to final leak testing, to locate visible leaks. Apply soap bubble mixture to joints and connections, examine for leakage.

b. Correct visible leaks and repeat preliminary test until visible leaks

are corrected. c. Gradually increase pressure in system to half of specified test

pressure. Thereafter, increase pressure in steps of approximately

15044-6

one-tenth of specified test pressure until required test pressure is reached.

d. Maintain pneumatic test pressure continuously for minimum of 10

minutes and for such additional time as necessary to conduct soap bubble examination for leakage.

e. Correct visible leakage and retest as specified. 4. Allowable Leakage: Piping system, exclusive of possible localized

instances at pump or valve packing, shall show no visual evidence of leakage.

5. After testing and final cleaning, purge with nitrogen those lines that will

carry flammable gases to assure no explosive mixtures will be present in system during filling process.

D. Hydrostatic Test For Gravity Piping: 1. Testing Equipment Accuracy: Plus or minus 1/2 gallon of water leakage

under specified conditions. 2. Maximum Allowable Leakage: 0.16 gallon per hour per inch diameter per

100 feet. Include service connection footage in test section, subjected to minimum head specified.

3. Gravity Sanitary and Roof Drain Piping: Test with 15 feet of water to

include highest horizontal vent in filled piping. Where vertical drain and vent systems exceed 15 feet in height, test systems in 15-foot vertical sections as piping is installed.

4. Exfiltration Test: a. Hydrostatic Head: i. At least 6 feet above maximum estimated groundwater

level in section being tested. ii. No less than 6 feet above inside top of highest section of

pipe in test section, including service connections. 5. Infiltration Test: a. Groundwater Level: At least 6 feet above inside top of highest

section of pipe in test section, including service connections.

15044-7

6. Piping with groundwater infiltration rate greater than allowable leakage

rate for exfiltration will be considered defective even if pipe previously passed a pressure test.

7. Defective Piping Sections: Replace or test and seal individual joints, and

retest as specified. E. Test Pressure: 1. All pipe shall be tested at pressures shown in the Piping Schedule and

Flow Stream Identification Table in the drawings and at a minimum shall be 1.5 times the normal working pressure of the pipe.

3.04 START-UP AND INSTRUCTION (Not Applicable)

END OF SECTION

15062-1

SECTION 15062

DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and

install, in the locations inside, and under buildings and structures as shown on the Drawings, all ductile iron piping, cast or ductile iron fittings, and appurtenances as specified herein.

B. General Design: The equipment and materials specified herein is intended to be

standard types of ductile iron pipe and cast or ductile iron fittings for use in transporting well and potable water. All materials that contact drinking water or drinking water chemicals shall comply with AWWA Standards and NSF Standard 61.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: All of the ductile iron pipe and cast or ductile iron fittings shall be

furnished by manufacturers who are fully experienced, reputable, and qualified in the manufacture of the materials to be furnished. The pipe and fittings shall be designed, constructed, installed in accordance with the best practices and methods and shall comply with these specifications as applicable.

B. Standards

1. Ductile Iron Pipe Thickness: ANSI A 21.50/AWWA C150

5. Ductile Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service: ANSI A-21.53/AWWA C153

2. Ductile Iron Pipe Centrifugally

Cast: ANSI A-21.51/ AWWA C151

6. Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Pipe: ANSI A-21.5/AWWA C105

3. Cement Mortar Lining for Water:

ANSI A-21.4/AWWA C104 7. Installation of Ductile Iron Water Mains:

AWWA C600 4. Cast and Ductile Iron Fittings:

ANSI A-21.10/AWWA C110 8. Disinfection of Water Mains:

AWWA C651 C. Factory Tests: The manufacturer shall perform the factory tests described in ANSI

A-21.51/AWWA C151.

15062-2

D. Quality Control

1. The manufacturer shall establish the necessary quality control and inspection practice to ensure compliance with the referenced standards.

2. In addition to the manufacturer's quality control procedures, the Owner may select

an independent testing laboratory to inspect the material at the foundry for compliance with these specifications. The cost of foundry inspection requested by the Owner will be paid for by the Owner.

E. Equipment Manufacturers: Manufacturers shall be selected from one of the specified

"Manufacturers" in the Orange County Utilities "List of Materials and Approved Manufacturers" as presented in an appendix of these technical specifications.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Materials and Shop Drawings 1. Submit shop drawings, including pipeline layouts, within and under buildings and

structures. Shop drawings shall include dimensioning, methods and locations of supports and all other pertinent technical specifications. Shop drawings shall be prepared by the pipe manufacturer. Shop drawings for piping within and under buildings and structures shall be submitted within 30 days of Execution of Contract.

2. For all pipes in contact with potable or raw water, submit certification that pipe and

fittings meet the requirements of NSF 61. B. Operating Instructions: Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals in accordance with

Section 01730. Pipe dimensions and liner thickness shall be provided in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

C. Manufacturer's Certification: Submit certification of compliance with the following,

sworn by a corporate officer of the manufacturer and witnessed by a notary:

1. Factory tests and results 2. Dimensions and weights of fittings per respective AWWA Standard.

1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Storage: Delivery and storage of the materials shall be in accordance with

the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Handling: Care shall be taken in loading, transporting and unloading to prevent damage

to the pipe or fittings and their respective coatings. Pipe or fittings shall not be rolled

15062-3

off the carrier or dropped. Unloading shall be done by lifting with a forklift or crane. All pipe or fittings shall be examined before laying, and no piece shall be installed which is found to be defective.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Ductile Iron Pipe

1. Standards: ANSI A-21.50, AWWA C150 and ANSI A-21.51, AWWA C151

2. Thickness

a. Below ground piping: Pipes shall be the following minimum thickness class unless otherwise noted or specified.

1) 4 through 12-inch diameter Class 350 2) 14 through 24-inch diameter Class 250 3) 30 through 64-inch diameter Class 200

b. Above Ground Piping 1) Flanged, Class 53 (Minimum)

3. Joints

a. Push-on or Mechanical Joints (below ground piping): 1) Standards: ANSI A21.11/AWWA C111 2) Class: The working pressure of the joint shall be equal to or exceed the

rated working pressure of the pipe. 3) Gaskets: SBR (Styrene Butadine Rubber)

b. Flanged (above ground or inside below ground vaults): 1) Standards: ANSI A21.15, ANSI B16.1 2) Class: 125 lb factory applied screwed long hub flanges, plain faced

without projection. 3) Gaskets

(a) Spans less than 10 feet: full face 1/8-inch thick neoprene rubber (b) Spans greater than 10 feet: Toroseal gaskets as manufactured by

American Cast Iron Pipe or equal.

c. Restrained Joints 1) Restrained joints shall be selected from one of the specified

"Manufacturers" and types specified in the Orange County Utilities "List of Materials and Approved Manufacturers" as presented in an appendix of these technical specifications.

2) Class: 250 psi (minimum) design pressure rating

15062-4

3) Standard mechanical joint retainer glands will not be acceptable.

d. Joint Accessories 1) Mechanical joint bolts, washers and nuts: Ductile iron or Corten steel. 2) Flanged joint bolts, washers and nuts:

(a) Above Ground: Hot dipped galvanized, Grade B, ASTM A-307 (b) Below Ground: 304 stainless steel

e. Pipe Length (below ground installation): 20 feet maximum nominal length. B. Fittings

1. Materials: Ductile iron or grey cast iron, AWWA C 110 2. Pressure Class

a. Mechanical Joint, Restrained Joint 1. 4-inch through 48-inch minimum 250 psi pressure rating 2. 54-inch through 64-inch minimum 150 psi pressure rating

b. Flanged Joint: Class 125, plain

3. Compact Fittings:

a. Mechanical Joint, restrained joint 4-inch through 64-inch: ANSI/AWWA A21. 53/C153

b. Flanged Joint 4-inch through 48-inch: ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10

c. Flanged Joints 54-inch through 64-inch: ANSI/AWWA A21.53/C153 4. Manufacturers: Manufacturers shall be selected from one of the specified


C. Wall Penetrations

1. Wall Pipes

a. Material: Ductile iron or cast iron

b. Type: Welded-on wall collar/water stop located in the center of the wall.

c. Design: Full thrust at 250 psi transmitted to the structure wall. Tapped mechanical joint wall pipes may be used to facilitate concrete form work.

15062-5

2. Wall Sleeves

a. Material: Galvanized Schedule 40 Steel Pipe, ASTM A120

b. Design: as manufactured by Thunderline Corporation, "Link Seal" or equal. 2.02 COATINGS, MARKINGS AND LININGS A. Exterior Coatings

1. Below ground or in a casing pipe

a. Type: Asphaltic coating, 1.0 mil DFT

b. Markings: (continuous 2-inch wide stripe within top 90 degrees of pipe - min. drying time 30 minutes before backfill). All ductile iron pipe shall be marked with a continuous stripe located within the top 90 degrees of the pipe. Said stripe shall be a minimum 2 inches in width and shall be oil based paint, blue in color for potable water, green for wastewater and purple for reuse. Backfill shall not be placed for 30 minutes following paint application. At the Contractor's option, the pipe may be stripe marked prior to pipe installation as follows:

Up to 8-inch diameter: (2) 2-inch wide @ 180° 10 to 16-inch diameter: (3) 2-inch wide @ 120° 18 to 24-inch diameter: (4) 2-inch wide @ 90° 30 to 54-inch diameter: (6) 2-inch wide @ 60°

c. Color: Potable Water: blue

Wastewater: green

d. Restrained joint bells shall be painted red.

2. Above Ground

a. Not subject to non-potable water submergence or splashing: See Division 9.

b. Subject to non-potable water submergence or splashing: See Division 9.

c. Color: See Division 9 B. Interior Lining (Applied by pipe manufacturer)

15062-6

1. Potable Water: Cement-mortar lining for ductile iron pipe and ductile and gray iron fittings for water service is in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4, and is listed by ANSI/NSF Standard 61 for potable water contact.

C. Polyethylene Encasement (required for all below ground piping, fittings and

appurtenances):

1. Standard: ANSI A 21.5/AWWA C105, 8 mil minimum thickness. 2. Color: Color coded per paragraph A.1. above.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Standards: AWWA C600-05 B. Underground Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings

1. Bedding for Ductile Iron Pipe: Minimum bedding requirements shall be Type 4 as defined in ANSI/AWWA C600, latest revision. Provide proper bedding required, in accordance with thickness class of pipe being laid and depth of cover. Proper pipe laying conditions shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C150 and C151, latest revisions, and ANSI/AWWA C600, latest revision.

2. Pipe Laying in Trench When pipe laying is in progress, the open ends of the pipe shall be closed by a water tight plug.

3. Placement

a. Alignment: In accordance with lines and grades shown on the Drawings. Deflection of joints shall not exceed 75 percent of that recommended by the manufacturer.

b. Polyethylene encasement: Provide polyethylene wrap around piping, fittings and appurtenances. Install per ANSI A 21.5/AWWA C105 on all buried piping, fittings and appurtances.

4. Cutting: When required, cutting shall be done by machine, leaving a smooth cut at

right angles to the axis of the pipe. Cut ends of the pipe to be used with a push-on bell shall be beveled. Cut surfaces shall be recoated as specified for the pipe.

15062-7

5. Joints

a. All mechanical joints shall be mechanically restrained.

b. Joint Placement

1) Push on joints: Pipe shall be laid with the bell ends facing upstream. The gasket shall be inserted and the joint surfaces cleaned and lubricated prior to placement of the pipe. After joining the pipe, a metal feeler shall be used to verify that the gasket is correctly located.

2) Mechanical Joints: Pipe and fittings shall be installed in accordance with the "Notes on Method of Installation" under ANSI A21.11/AWWA C111. The gasket shall be inserted and the joint surfaces cleaned and lubricated with soapy water before tightening the bolts to the specified torque.

C. Above ground and interior ductile iron pipe and fittings

1. Pipe Supports

a. General: All piping shall be properly supported with hangers, supports, base elbows and tees, concrete piers and pads as shown on the Drawings and specified in Section 15126: Hangers and Supports and herein. All pipe and appurtenances connected to equipment shall be supported to prevent any strain from being imposed on the equipment.

b. Support spacing: 8 feet minimum on centers and at each fitting and where shown on the Drawings.

c. Hangers for Horizontal Piping 1) Material: Heavy malleable iron 2) Type: Adjustable, swivel, split ring or adjustable swivel, pipe-roll

d. Hangers for vertical piping 1) Material: Wrought Iron 2) Type: Clamp

2. Placement

a. Alignment: In accordance with lines and grades shown on the Drawings. Each section of pipe shall be cleaned thoroughly prior to installation.

3. Flanged Joints: Joints shall be fitted so that the contact faces bear uniformly on the

gasket.

15062-8

D. Thrust Restraint

1. General: Thrust restraint shall be accomplished by restrained joints. 2. Length of Restrained Joints: Restrained joints shall be provided for all buried

piping systems to restrain system thrust. It is intended that all pipe, valve and fitting joints be restrained on the water plant site. For the off-site water transmission main, restrained joints shall be provided in accordance with Detail 2 on Sheet D-509.

3.02 CLEANING A. General: At the conclusion of the work, the Contractor shall thoroughly clean the new

pipe lines by flushing with water or other means to remove all dirt, stones or other material which may have entered the line during the construction period.

B. Correction of Non-Conforming Work: All non-conforming work shall be repaired or

replaced by the Contractor at no additional expense to the Owner. Non-conforming work shall be defined as failure to adhere to any specific or implied directive of this Project Manual and/or the drawings, including but not limited to pipe not laid straight, true to the lines and grades as shown on the drawings, damaged or unacceptable materials, misalignment or diameter ring deflection in pipe due to bedding or backfilling, visible or detectable leakage and failure to pass any specified test or inspection.

3.03 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. All pipe shall be inspected and tested at the Foundry. B. The Owner shall have the right to have any or all piping, fittings or special castings

inspected and tested by an independent testing agency at the foundry or elsewhere. Such inspections and testing will be at the Owner's expense.

C. Mark as rejected and immediately remove from the job site, all pipe lengths showing a

crack, damaged lining or receiving a severe blow that may cause an incipient fracture, even though no such fracture can be seen.

D. Removal of Cracked Portions 1. Any pipe showing a distinct crack, but no incipient fracture beyond the limits of the

visible crack, may be cut off and the sound portion installed. Cut the pipe at least 12-inches from the visible limits of the crack. Cutting of pipe shall be done by skilled workmen, and in such a manner as to not damage the pipe. Every cut shall be square and smooth, with no damage to the pipe lining. Cut surfaces shall be recoated as specified for the pipe.

15062-9

2. Cutting and installing cracked pipe shall only be performed when approved by the

Engineer, and shall be at the expense of the Contractor. E. Carefully inspect and hammer test all pipe and fittings prior to installation. F. Hydrostatic Testing: Test in accordance with Section 15044: Pressure Testing of Pipe.

Test pressures are shown in the Piping Pressure Test Schedule, Table 15044-A of Section 15044.

3.04 DISINFECTION A. See Section 15041 – Disinfection of Piping and Structures.

END OF SECTION

15064-1

SECTION 15064

POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: 1. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required, and install

and test in the locations as shown on the Drawings, the polyvinyl chloride piping, fittings and appurtenances as specified herein.

B. Related Work Described Elsewhere:

1. Schedule 80 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, Fittings and Valves are included in Section 15070.

2. Valves and appurtenances are included in Section 15100. 3. Pipe hangers and supports are included in Section 15126. 4. Couplings and connectors are included in Section 15129. C General Design: 1. PVC Piping shall be installed in the locations as shown on the Drawings. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All plastic pipe, fittings and appurtenances shall be furnished by a single

manufacturer who is fully experienced, reputable, and qualified in the manufacture of the items to be furnished. The equipment shall be designed, constructed, and installed in accordance with the best practices and methods and shall comply with these Specifications.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Materials and Shop Drawings: 1. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval in

accordance with the General Conditions and Section 01340 and shall

15064-2

include dimensioning and the technical specification for all piping to be furnished.

B. Additional Information: 1. Submit to the Engineer, for approval, samples of all materials specified

herein, along with the manufacturer's Certificates of Inspection, descriptive literature, illustrations, specifications, installation instructions and related information.

C. Operating Instructions (Not Applicable) 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. PVC pipe shall be delivered to the site in unbroken bundles packaged in such

manner as to provide protection against damage. When possible pipe should be stored at the job site in the unit packages until ready for use. Packaged units shall be handled using a fork lift or a spreader bar with fabric straps. Packaged units shall not be stacked at the job site higher than two units high.

B. When it is necessary to store PVC pipe for more than 30 days, exposure to direct

sunlight shall be prevented by covering the pipe with an opaque material. Adequate air circulation above and around the pipe shall be provided as required to prevent excessive heat accumulation. PVC pipe shall not be stored close to heat sources or hot objects such as heaters, fires, boilers or engine exhaust. Pipe gaskets shall be protected from excessive exposure to heat, direct sunlight, ozone, oil and grease. The interior and all sealing surfaces of pipe, fittings and other appurtenances shall be kept clean and free of dirt and foreign matter.

C. Care shall be taken in handling and laying pipe and fittings to avoid severe impact

blows, crushing, abrasion damage, gouging or cutting. Pipe shall be lowered, not dropped, from trucks or into trenches. All cracked, damaged or defective pipe and fittings, or any length of pipe having a gouge, scratch or other permanent indentation of more than 10 percent of the wall thickness in depth, shall be rejected and removed at once from the work and replaced with new acceptable pipe at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.05 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEES A. Provide equipment warranty in accordance with Section 01740 - Warrantees and

Bonds.

15064-3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All materials that come into contact with the water being treated or the finished

water shall be on either the EPA or NSF lists of products approved for use in contact with potable water. Manufacturers shall submit an affidavit with the shop drawings indicating approval by the EPA or NSF for the materials used in products that come into contact with the water, in accordance with Rule 62-555.320(3) Florida Administrative Code.

2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Small PVC Pressure Piping

Unless otherwise specified, PVC pressure pipe 3 inches and smaller shall be Schedule 80 PVC per Specification 15070.

B. Small Gravity Sewer Piping PVC pipe 4 inches nominal diameter and smaller used for gravity sewer piping

shall be Schedule 40 pipe in accordance with ASTM D1785. Schedule 40 PVC pipe shall have solvent welded joints as specified for PVC pressure pipe. All PVC pipe for gravity sewers shall be green in color.

2.03 ACCESSORIES (Not Applicable) 2.04 SPARE PARTS A. Special tools, solvents, lubricants, and caulking compounds required for normal

installation shall be furnished with the pipe. 2.05 QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor shall follow Manufacturer's and Supplier's recommended product

quality control specifies as required for project. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION

A. Contractor shall provide training on PVC pipe installation before any work begins.

15064-4

3.02 INSTALLATION A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling shall be performed in accordance with the

requirements of Section 02200: Earthwork. Bedding for PVC pipe shall be Class B using granular pipe bedding material as specified in ASCE Manual No. 37 and as shown on the standard details.

B. All PVC pipe and fittings shall be laid in accordance with the pipe manufacturers

published installation guide, the AWWA Manual of Practice No. M23 "PVC Pipe - Design and Installation" recommendations.

C. In preparation of pipe installation, placement (stringing) of pipe should be as close

to the trench as practical on the opposite side of the trench from the excavated material.

D. Pipe and fittings shall be laid accurately to the lines and grades indicated on

drawings or required. Care shall be taken to insure a good alignment both horizontally and vertically and to give the pipe a firm bearing along its entire length. Any pipe which has its grade or joint disturbed after laying shall be taken up and re-laid. No deflections will be allowed on PVC pipe and joints.

E. All pipe and fittings shall be cleared of sand, dirt and debris before laying. All

precautions shall be taken to prevent sand, dirt or other foreign material from entering the pipe during installation. If necessary, a heavy, tightly woven canvas bag of suitable size shall be placed over each end of the pipe before lowering into the trench and left there until the connection is made to the adjacent pipe. Any sand, dirt or other foreign material that enters the pipe shall be removed from the pipe immediately. Interior of all pipe and fittings shall be kept clean after installation until accepted in the complete work.

F. Any time that pipe installation is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be

closed by a watertight plug or other method approved by the Engineer. Plugs shall remain in pipe ends until all water is removed from the trench. No pipe shall be installed when trench conditions are unsuitable for such work, including standing water, excess mud, rain or snow.

G. Field Cutting Pipe: 1. Field cutting of pipe shall be done in a neat workmanlike manner without

creating damage to the pipe. The pipe shall be cut square with a fine toothed hand or power saw or other cutter or knife designed for the use with plastic pipe. Prior to cutting, the pipe shall be marked around its entire circumference or a square-in vise shall be used to ensure the pipe end is cut square. Remove burrs by smoothing edges with a knife, file or sandpaper. Bevel the cut end of the pipe using a pipe beveling tool, wood

15064-5

rasp, or portable sander to prevent damage to the gasket during joint assembly. A factory finished beveled end should be used as a guide to ensure proper beveling angle and correct depth of bevel. Round off any sharp edges on the leading edge of the bevel with a knife or file.

I. Field Painting: 1. Pipe normally exposed to view shall be painted and marked as specified in

the Painting Section 09900. The engineer will assist in identifying pipe contents, direction of flow and all else required for proper marking of pipe.

3.03 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. All PVC piping shall be hydrostatically pressure tested and flushed in accordance

with Section 15044. 3.04 START-UP AND INSTRUCTION (Not Applicable) 3.05 DISINFECTION (See Section 15041 – Disinfection of Piping and Structures)

END OF SECTION

15070-1

SECTION 15070

SCHEDULE 80 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE, FITTINGS, AND VALVES

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: 1. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required, and install

and test in the locations as shown on the Drawings, the Schedule 80 polyvinyl chloride (PVC) piping, fittings and appurtenances specified herein. Schedule 80 PVC piping shall be used on all small diameter PVC piping systems (3 inches and smaller in diameter) which includes, but are not limited to, non-potable water, potable water and chemical feeds and in all other locations as shown on the Drawings.

B. Related Work Described Elsewhere: 1. Painting: Section 09900. 2. Piping, Valve and Equipment Identification System: Section 09905. 3. Chemical Feed Systems: Section 11241. 4. Pressure Testing of Piping: Section 15044. 5. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings: Section 15064. 6. Chemical Feed System Piping: Section 15090. 7. Pipe Hangers and Supports: Section 15126. 8. Couplings and Connectors: Section 15129. C. General Design: 1. Schedule 80 PVC piping shall be installed in the locations as shown on the

Drawings. All plastic pipe and fittings shall conform to this specification section whether provided as a part of an equipment "package" or purchased separately by the Contractor.

15070-2

2. All small diameter pipe, 3-inch diameter and smaller, shall be made of polyvinyl chloride unless noted otherwise on the Drawings or in other sections of the specifications.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All plastic pipe, fittings and appurtenances shall be furnished by a single

manufacturer who is fully experienced, reputable, and qualified in the manufacture of the items to be furnished. The equipment shall be designed, constructed, and installed in accordance with the best practices and methods and shall comply with these Specifications. The equipment shall be manufactured by Spears, IPEX, or an Engineer approved equal.

B. All plastic valves of similar type shall be furnished by a single manufacturer who

is fully experienced, reputable, and qualified in the manufacture of the items to be furnished. The valve equipment shall be designed, constructed, and installed in accordance with the best practices and methods and shall comply with these specifications. The equipment shall be manufactured by Asahi/America, Plast-O-Matic, Hayward, or approved equal.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Materials and Shop Drawings: 1. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval in

accordance with the General Conditions and Section 01340. All products within this specification shall be combined into a single submittal which shall include at least the following:

a. Dimensioning and the technical specification for all piping,

fittings, and appurtenances to be furnished. b. Letter of Certification from the National Sanitation Foundation

International (NSF) stating compliance with Standard 14 and Standard 61.

c. Letter from the Manufacturer verifying chemical compatibility of

all products to be used in chemical feed systems. d. For valves, show valve dimensions, including laying lengths. Show

part sizes, show dimensions and orientation of valve activators installed on the valves.

e. For valves, submit Manufacturer's catalog data and detail

construction sheets showing all valve parts. Describe each part by

15070-3

material of construction, specification (such as ANSI, ASTM, SAE, or CDA), and grade or type. Identify each valve by tag number and service to which the catalog data and detail sheets pertain.

B. Additional Information: 1. Submit to the Engineer, for approval, samples of all materials specified

herein, along with the manufacturer's Certificates of Inspection, descriptive literature, illustrations, specifications, installation instructions and related information.

1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Piping, fittings, valves and appurtenances shall be handled, shipped, and stored in

accordance with Section 01600: Material and Equipment. B. PVC pipe shall be delivered to the site in unbroken bundles packaged in such

manner as to provide protection against damage. When possible, pipe should be stored at the job site in the unit packages until ready for use. Packaged units shall be handled using a forklift or a spreader bar with fabric straps. Packaged units shall not be stacked at the job site higher than two units high.

C. When it is necessary to store PVC pipe for more than 30 days, exposure to direct

sunlight shall be prevented by covering the pipe with an opaque material. Adequate air circulation above and around the pipe shall be provided as required to prevent excessive heat accumulation. PVC pipe shall not be stored close to heat sources or hot objects such as heaters, fires, boilers or engine exhaust. Pipe gaskets shall be protected from excessive exposure to heat, direct sunlight, ozone, oil and grease. The interior and all sealing surfaces of pipe, fittings and other appurtenances shall be kept clean and free of dirt and foreign matter.

D. Care shall be taken in handling and laying pipe and fittings to avoid severe impact

blows, crushing, abrasion damage, gouging or cutting. Pipe shall be lowered, not dropped, from trucks or into trenches. All cracked, damaged or defective pipe and fittings, or any length of pipe having a gouge, scratch or other permanent indentation of more than 10 percent of the wall thickness in depth, shall be rejected and removed at once from the work and replaced with new acceptable pipe at no additional cost to the Owner.

15070-4

1.05 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEES A. Provide equipment warranty in accordance with Section 01740 - Warranties and

Bonds. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All materials that come into contact with the water being treated or the finished

water shall be on either the EPA or NSF lists of products approved for use in contact with potable water. Manufacturers shall submit an affidavit with the shop drawings indicating approval by the EPA or NSF for the materials used in products that come into contact with the water, in accordance with Rule 62-555.320(3) Florida Administrative Code.

B. Valve shall include operator, actuator, operating nut, and accessories for a

complete operation. C. All valves and appurtenances shall have the name of the manufacturer and the

working pressure for which they are designed cast in raised letters upon some appropriate part of the body.

2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Pipe:

1. PVC Pipe: a. Pipe shall be made of polyvinyl chloride, Schedule 80 PVC pipe,

conforming to ASTM D1784 and ASTM D1785. Schedule 80 PVC pipe shall have solvent welded or threaded joints. Chemical feed lines shall have solvent welded joints.

B. Fittings:

1. PVC Fittings:

a. Fittings for Schedule 80 PVC pipe 4 inches and smaller in diameter shall be socket type, solvent welded in conformance with ASTM D 2467 or threaded type in conformance with ASTM D 2464. Solvent welded and threaded joints shall be watertight. Liquid chlorine feed lines shall have solvent welded fittings.

15070-5

b. Fittings for Schedule 80 PVC pipe greater than 4 inches in diameter shall be socket type, solvent welded in conformance with ASTM D 2467. Fittings shall be a 1-piece injection molded design. Use of low pressure fabricated PVC fittings will not be permitted.

C. Solvent Cement: 1. PVC solvent cement in services other than Sodium Hypochlorite shall be

in compliance with ASTM D 2564 and F656. Solvent Cement in Sodium Hypochlorite service shall be free of Silica. Products for Solvent Cement in Sodium Hypochlorite service shall be IPS "Weld-On" or Oatey "Lo V.O.C. PVC Heavy Duty Gray."

2. Solvent cement shall be specified by compatibility based on pipe service

and size. 3. Manufacturer to provide certification with submittal. D. Flanges: 1. Slip-on flanges shall be provided to connect to flanged valves, fittings, or

equipment. Flanges shall match the connecting flanges on the adjacent fitting, valve or piece of equipment and must meet the test pressure of the piping system as specified in Section 15044.

2. Flange hardware (bolts, nuts, and washers) for PVC flanges shall be Type

316 stainless steel in accordance with ASTM F593 and F594, respectively. Flange hardware for PVC flanges on Hydrofluosilicic Acid and Sodium Hypochlorite piping shall be Hastelloy C.

3. Flange gaskets shall be EPDM for water service. For chemical feed piping

systems, the gasket material shall be selected by the gasket manufacturer based on the chemical concentrations as specified in Section 15090: Chemical Feed System Piping.

E. Ball Valve 1. PVC Ball Valve a. Valve: Ball valves shall be manufactured of Grade 1, Type I, PVC

with Teflon seals. Seals shall be EPDM except for hydrofluosilicic acid service, which shall be Viton. Valve shall be provided with double unions and ball blocking feature.

b. Operator: Handle.

15070-6

c. Pressure: 150 psi @ 73°F. d. Service: Water. e. Plast-O-Matic True Blue, Asahi/America Type 21 Ball Valve, or

approved equal. 2. PVC Ball Valve with Vent Hole a. Valve: Ball valve shall be manufactured of Grade 1, Type I, PVC

and shall be of true union design with two-way blocking capability. All O-rings shall be Viton and Teflon seats. Teflon seats shall have elastomeric backing cushion of the same material as the valve seals. Stem shall have double o-rings and be of blowout proof design. The addition of a 1/8 inch vent hole drilled and deburred by the manufacturer is required. The valve shall be installed with the vent hole on the upstream side of the system to keep the cavity of the ball fluidized. The valve handle shall double as carrier removal and/or tightening tool.

b. Operator: Handle. c. Pressure: 150 psi @ 73°F. d. Service: Sodium Hypochlorite.

c. Plast-O-Matic True Blue, Asahi/America DuoBloc-21, or approved equal.

F. Check Valves 1. PVC Ball Check Valve a. Valve: Ball check valve shall be manufactured of Type I, Grade 1

PVC with Viton seals, and designed for horizontal or vertical installation with equal effectiveness. Valves shall be provided with double true unions.

b. Pressure: 150 psi @ 73°F. c. Service: Water and sodium hypochlorite. d. Asahi/America, Hayward True Check, or approved equal.

15070-7

G. PVC Solenoid Valve 1. Valve: PVC solenoid valve shall be manufactured of Grade 1, Type I,

PVC with Viton seals. Valve shall be provided with double true unions. 2. Pressure: 150 psi @ 70°F. 3. Electrical: 110 VAC 4. Service: Hydrofluosilicic acid. 5. Asahi/America, Hayward, or approved equal. H. PVC Needle Valve 1. Valve: PVC needle valve shall be manufactured of Type I, Grade 1 PVC

with Viton seals, with socket end connection. Valves shall have a globe pattern body with a removable bonnet cap with replaceable PTFE seal.

2. Pressure: 200 psi @ 73°F. 3. Service: Water. 4. Hayward, Spears, or approved equal. I. Wye Strainer: PVC wye strainers shall be manufactured of the same material as

the pipe, with 40-mesh screens and Viton seals. Connecting ends shall be the socket type, solvent welded.

2.03 ACCESSORIES (Not Applicable) 2.04 SPARE PARTS

A. One (1) set of all special tools, solvents, lubricants, and cements required for normal installation shall be furnished with the pipe.

B. Provide one spare screen for each strainer. 2.05 QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor shall follow Manufacturer's and Supplier's recommended product

quality control specifics as required for project.

15070-8

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION (Not Applicable) 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install PVC pipe and valves where shown on the Drawings and in strict

accordance with the manufacturer's technical data and printed instructions. B. Joints for Schedule 80 PVC pipe and fittings shall be solvent welded, flanged, or

threaded. All joints shall be made watertight. All pipe cutting, threading and jointing procedures for solvent welded and threaded PVC pipe joints shall be in strict accordance with the pipe and fittings manufacturer's printed installation instructions. Thread lubricant for threaded joints shall be Teflon tape only. In making solvent welded connections, clean dirt and moisture from pipe and fittings, bevel pipe ends slightly with emery cloth, if necessary and apply solvent cement of proper grade.

C. Installation of valves and fittings shall be strictly in accordance with the

manufacturer's instructions. Particular care shall be taken not to over-stress threaded connections at sleeves. In making solvent weld connections the solvent shall not be spilled on valves or allowed to run from joints.

D. All piping shall have sufficient number of unions to allow convenient removal

and shall be as approved by the Engineer. E. Concrete inserts for hangers and supports shall be furnished and installed in the

concrete as it is placed. The inserts shall be set in accordance with the requirements of the piping layout and the Contractor shall verify their locations from approved piping layout Drawings and the structural Drawings.

F. Field Painting: 1. Pipe normally exposed to view shall be painted and marked as specified in

Section 09905: Piping, Valve and Equipment Identification System. G. Jointing: 1. Clean each pipe length, coupling and fitting of all debris and dirt before

installation. 2. Do not use pipe length if there are any cuts, abrasions, or defects on the

surface of the pipe.

15070-9

3. Provide and use coupling pullers for joining the pipe when required. 4. Shove home each length of pipe against the pipe previously laid and hold

securely in position. 5. Do not pull or cramp joints. H. Fabrication: 1. Cutting: a. Use a hand saw or pipe cutter with blades (not rollers). b. Examine all cut ends for possible cracks caused by cutting. 2. Connecting: a. Solvent weld connections are recommended by the manufacturer. b. Connect pipe and fittings only when temperature is above the

minimum recommended by the manufacturer. c. Threaded adapters shall be connected only with plastic male into

metal female. 3.03 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. All PVC piping shall be hydrostatically pressure tested and flushed in accordance

with the requirements in Section 15044: Pressure Testing of Piping. 3.04 DISINFECTION (See Section 15041 – Disinfection of Piping and Structures) 3.05 START-UP AND INSTRUCTION (Not Applicable)

END OF SECTION

15090-1

SECTION 15090

CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEM PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope or Work:

1. This section covers furnishing and installation of piping and piping accessories and chemical feed systems for the sodium hypochlorite feed system and hydrofluosilicic acid feed system.

2. Piping shall be furnished and installed complete with all fittings, jointing

materials, hangers, supports, anchors, and other necessary appurtenances. 3. Material furnished and work performed under this Section shall be

coordinated with material and equipment furnished and installed in Section 11241, Chemical Feed System.

B. Related Work Described Elsewhere: Other sections directly related to work

covered in this section include the following: 1. Excavating, Backfilling, and Compacting: Section 02220. 2. Painting: Section 09900. 3. Piping, Valve, and Equipment Identification System: Section 09905. 4. Division 15. C. General Design (Not Applicable) 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. PVC Pipe: As specified in Section 15070. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Materials and Shop Drawings: Complete specifications, data, and catalog cuts or

drawings covering the following items furnished under this section shall be

15090-2

submitted in accordance with Section 01340: Shop Drawings, Working Drawings and Samples.

1. Expansion joints for PVC pipe. 2. Flange gaskets. 3. PVC chemical service pipe and fittings. 4. Pipe sleeves. 5. Pipe supports. 1.04 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Operating and Maintenance Manual: Furnish Operation and Maintenance

Manuals in accordance with Section 01730: Operating and Maintenance Data. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Pipe and fittings shall be handled and stored in a manner which will ensure

installation in sound, undamaged condition. Handling methods and equipment used shall prevent damage to the protective coating and shall include the use of end hooks, padded calipers, and nylon or similar fabric slings with spreader bars. Bare cables, chains, or metal bars shall not be used. Coated pipe shall be stored off the ground on wide padded skids. Whenever the storage period on the job exceeds 30 days, plastic coated pipe shall be covered or otherwise protected from exposure to sunlight.


Bonds. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL (Not Applicable) 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings:

15090-3

1. Materials for polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings shall be as specified in Section 15070; Schedule 80 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, Fittings, and Valves.

2. Joints and jointings shall be as specified in Section 15070; Schedule 80

Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) and Pipe and Fittings. B. Polyethylene Tubing: 1. Provide blue polyethylene tubing where indicated on the Drawings. Design

for continuous indoor and outdoor (ultraviolet resistant) service. Minimum operating pressure shall be 250 psi. Polyethylene tubing shall be made from PE 4710 resin and shall be NSF certified and meet AWWA C901 Standards. Connect tubing sections by means of PVC barbed insert type hose fittings with stainless steel clamp. All fittings shall be inside of chemical pull boxes. No fitting shall be allowed inside the carrier pipe.

2. Products: Endo Pure tubing as manufactured by Endot Industries, or

Engineer-approved equal. 3. Test pressure for tubing shall be the same as the PVC piping to which it is

connected. D. Piping Schedule: 1. Refer to Table 15090-1 for the Schedule of Materials to be used on each

piping system, the conditions of service and hydrostatic testing requirements.

E. Fabrication and Manufacture: 1. A union shall be provided within 2 feet of each threaded end valve unless

there are other connections which will permit easy removal of the valve. Unions shall also be provided in piping at locations adjacent to devices or equipment which may require removal in the future and at locations required by the drawings or specifications.

2. Taps for pressure gauge connections on the suction and discharge of

pumping units shall be provided with a nipple and a shutoff gauge cock. 3. Pipe hangers and supports shall be provided as specified in Section 15126;

Hangers and Supports.

15090-4

2.03 ACCESSORIES (Not Applicable) 2.04 SPARE PARTS (Not Applicable) 2.05 QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor shall follow Manufacturer's and Supplier's recommended product

quality control specifics as required for this project. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. All fittings, couplings, specials, and other exterior surfaces of buried piping not

protected with plastic coating shall be tape wrapped in the field. All surfaces to be tape wrapped shall be thoroughly cleaned and primed in accordance with the tape manufacturer's recommendations immediately before wrapping. Tape wrapping shall be two ply (half lap) application or as required to provide a total installed tape thickness of not less than 60 mils. Joints in plastic coated pipe shall be cleaned, primed, and tape wrapped after installation.

3.02 INSTALLATION A. Pipe: 1. Pipe shall be installed as specified, as indicated on the drawings or, in the

absence of detail piping arrangement, in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.

2. Pipe shall be cut from measurements taken at the site and not from the

drawings. All necessary provisions shall be taken in laying out piping to provide throughout for expansion and contraction. Piping shall not obstruct openings or passageways. Pipes shall be held free of contact with building construction so as not to transmit noise resulting from expansion.

3. Stuffing box leakage from water sealed pumps shall be piped to the nearest

point of drainage collection. 4. Buried PVC piping shall be "snaked" in the trench and shall be kept as

cool as possible during installation. PVC pipe shall be kept shaded and shall be covered with backfill immediately after installation and testing.

5. All piping shall be installed so that lines are readily accessible for

cleaning. At changes in direction in all chemical piping, tees shall be

15090-5

provided with extra openings plugged to facilitate cleaning. Teflon thread tape or Teflon thread sealer shall be applied to the threads of all plugs so that they can be easily removed. At each point where hose or reinforced plastic tubing is connected to rigid piping, a quick disconnect coupling shall be provided.

B. Pipe Joints: Pipe joints shall be carefully and neatly made in accordance with the

requirements which follow. 1. Threaded: a. Pipe threads shall conform to ANSI 82.1, NPT, and shall be full

and cleanly cut with sharp dies. Not more than three threads at each pipe connection shall remain exposed after installation. Ends of pipe shall be reamed, after threading and before assembly, to remove all burrs.

b. Threaded joints in plastic piping shall be made up with Teflon

thread tape applied to all male threads. 2. Solvent Welded: All joint preparation, cutting and jointing operations

shall comply with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations and ASTM D2855. Pipe ends shall be beveled or chamfered to the dimensions recommended by the manufacturer. Newly assembled joints shall be suitably blocked or restrained to prevent movement during the set time recommended by the manufacturer. Pressure testing of solvent welded piping systems shall not be performed until the applicable curing time, set forth in Table X2.1 of ASTM D2855, has elapsed.

3. Flanged: Flange bolts shall be tightened sufficiently to slightly compress

the gasket and effect a seal, but not so tight as to fracture or distort the flanges. A plain washer shall be installed under the head and nut of bolts connecting plastic pipe flanges. Anti-seize thread lubricant shall be applied to the threaded portion of all stainless steel bolts during assembly.

C. Pipe Sleeves: 1. Piping passing through or below concrete or masonry shall be installed

through sleeves installed before the concrete is placed or when masonry is laid.

2. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, all pipes passing through or

below walls or slabs shall be sealed watertight with special rubber gasketed sleeve and joint assemblies or with sleeves and modular rubber sealing elements.

15090-6

3. Buried pipe sleeves enclosing chemical-piping shall be sloped to the open

end as indicated on the drawings to allow observation of leakage of the chemical piping. The upper end of each sleeve shall be sealed watertight.

3.03 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. All shop applied plastic coatings and tape wrap on pipe or fittings shall be

inspected for holidays and other defects after receipt of the pipe or fitting on the job and immediately before installation. All field applied tape wrap on pipe, pipe joints, fittings, and valves shall be inspected for holidays and other defects following completion of wrapping. Inspection of plastic coatings before installation of the pipe or fitting in the sleeve shall be made where, in the opinion of the Engineer, the coating may have been damaged during assembly. Holidays and defects disclosed by inspection shall be repaired in accordance with the recommendations of the coating or tape wrap manufacturer, as applicable.

B. Inspection shall be made using an electrical holiday detector. The detector and

inspection procedures shall conform to the requirements of Section 4.5. C. Pressure and Leakage Testing: 1. All specified tests shall be made by and at the expense of the Contractor in

the presence, and to the satisfaction of, the Engineer. Each piping system shall be tested in accordance with Section 15044 and at a minimum, must experience no loss of pressure for at least one hour.

2. Compressed air or pressure gas shall not be used to test plastic piping

unless specifically recommended by the pipe manufacturer. 3. Leakage may be determined by loss of pressure, soap solution, chemical

indicator, or other positive and accurate method acceptable to the Engineer. All fixtures, devices, or other accessories which are to be connected to the lines and which would be damaged if subjected to the specified test pressure shall be disconnected and ends of the branch lines plugged or capped as required during the testing procedures.

4. Drainage and venting systems shall be tested by filling with water to the

level of the highest vent stack. Openings shall be plugged as necessary. Each system shall hold the water for 30 minutes without any drop in the water level.

5. All necessary testing equipment and materials, including tools, appliances

and devices, shall be furnished and all tests shall be made by and at the expense of the Contractor and at such time as directed by the Engineer.

15090-7

6. All joints in piping shall be tight and free from leaks. All joints which are

found to leak by observation or during any specified test shall be repaired and tests repeated.

D. Cleaning: 1. The inside of all pipe, valves, and fittings shall be smooth, clean, and free

from blisters, loose mill scale, sand, dirt, and other foreign matter when erected. The interior of all lines shall be thoroughly cleaned, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, before being placed in service.

2. Lines which have been flushed with water shall be air dried with

compressed air immediately following drainage.

TABLE 15090-1 CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEM

PIPING SCHEDULE

Service Pipe I.D.

Size (in.)

Pipe Material

Class Specification Section No.

Test Pressure

(psig)

Hydrofluosilicic Acid1

HSFA 2 & Smaller PVC SCH 80 15070 150

Sodium Hypochlorite1

NaOCl 3 & Smaller PVC SCH 80 15070 150

Vent V 6 & Smaller PVC SCH 80 15070 -- Note: 1. Buried piping shall consist of polyethylene tubing per Section 15090 inside a 3-inch

Schedule 80 PVC carrier pipe.

END OF SECTION

15100-1

SECTION 15100

VALVES AND APPURTENANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Scope of Work: Furnish, install, support, and test valves, gates, hydrants, strainers,

stops, and faucets, (hereinafter referred to as "valves") in the location(s) and of the size(s) and quantities shown on the Drawings. The requirements of this specification apply to all valves specified.

B. General Design

1. All of the equipment and materials specified herein are intended to be standard for use in controlling the flow of sewage, water, sludge, chemicals, air, etc., depending on the applications.

2. All valves and appurtenances shall have the name of the manufacturer and the

working pressure for which they are designed cast in raised letters upon some appropriate part of the body.

3. For all buried valves in which the operating nut is deeper than three (3) feet from

the finish ground surface, an extension rod with 2 inch operating nut and upper guide shall be installed permanently in the riser section.

4. All exposed valves shall have "open/closed" position indicators. The position

indicators shall be conveniently located for easy visibility. Valves shall open counter clockwise.

5. All valves installed such that actuators are more than six feet above the floor shall

have chain wheel operated geared actuators with stainless steel chains. Gear actuators shall be bevel or spur gear as recommended by the manufacturer.

6. All exposed valves 6 inches and larger shall be handwheel operated. Valves over 6

feet above the finished floor shall have chain operator.

7. Valve packing shall be replaceable without removing the valve from service. 8. All valves in water service shall be in accordance with ANSI/NSF61.

15100-2

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications

1. All equipment furnished under this Specification shall be new and unused and shall be a standard product which has a successful record of reliable service in similar installations for a minimum of five (5) years.

2. All valves of same type and duty shall be furnished by a single manufacturer.

B. Standards

1. ANSI 3. SSPC 2. AISI 4. AWWA

C. Warranty: Provide manufacturer's warranty in accordance with the General Conditions

and Section 01740: Warranties and Bonds. D. Equipment Manufacturers

1. Equipment manufacturers are named in each individual valve specification and where applicable shall be selected from one of the specified "Manufacturers" in the Orange County Utilities "List of Materials and Approved Manufacturers" as presented in an appendix of these technical specifications.

2. The naming or reference to a specific manufacturer does not indicate that the

manufacturer's standard equipment is acceptable in lieu of the specified component features. This reference is only an indication that the named manufacturers may have the capability of supplying the equipment as specified.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Materials and Shop Drawings: Copies of all materials required to establish compliance

with the Specification shall be submitted in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions and Section 01340: Shop Drawings, Working Drawings, and Samples. Submittals shall include at least the following:

1. Certified shop drawings showing all important details of construction, dimensions

(including laying length), and weight.

2. Descriptive literature, bulletins, and/or catalogs showing all valve parts, and describing material of construction by material and specification, e.g., AISI.

3. Schedule of valves, referencing each valve type, end connections and actuators to

the proposed location/application on the Drawings.

15100-3

4. Valve coatings and linings, if any.

5. Valve Tag Identification Schedule (see PART 2).

6. See individual sections for additional requirements.

B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: For all valves furnished under this Section, the

Contractor shall submit operation and maintenance manuals in accordance with Section 01730: Operating and Maintenance Data, to include the following:

1. Equipment function. 2. Description. 3. Normal and limiting operating characteristics. 4. Installation instructions (assembly, alignment and adjustment procedures). 5. Operation instructions (normal start-up and shut-down procedures, normal

operating conditions and emergency situations). 6. Lubrication and maintenance instructions. 7. Troubleshooting guide. 8. Parts list and predicted life of parts subject to wear. 9. Drawings - cross-sectional view, assembly diagrams.

1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery of Materials and Equipment

1. All parts shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration will occur during a prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation is completed.

2. Factory assembled parts and components shall not be dismantled for shipment

unless permission is received in writing from the Engineer. 3. Finished surfaces of all exposed openings shall be protected by wooden blanks,

strongly built and securely bolted thereto.

4. Finished iron or steel surfaces not painted shall be properly protected to prevent rust and corrosion.

5. After hydrostatic or other tests, all entrapped water shall be drained prior to

shipment, and proper care shall be taken to protect parts from the entrance of water during shipment, storage and handling.

6. Each box or package shall be properly marked to show its net weight in addition to

its contents.

15100-4

B. Storage of Materials and Equipment

1. Store valves and accessories in an area on the construction site protected from weather, moisture, or possible damage.

2. Do not store valves or accessories directly on the ground or in the open.

C. Handling of Materials and Equipment

1. Handle valves and accessories to prevent damage of any nature.

2. Carefully inspect all materials for:

a. Defects in workmanship and materials. b. Removal of debris and foreign material in valve openings and seats. c. Proper functioning of all operating mechanisms. d. Tightness of all nuts and bolts.

1.05 SPECIAL TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS A. Special Tools

1. All special tools required for normal operation and maintenance shall be provided in accordance with Division 1.

2. One (1) tee handle operator shall be provided for every three (3) buried valves.

Include, at a minimum, one (1) 4-foot, one (1) 5-foot, and one (1) adjustable handle. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Materials shall be as indicated in specific sections, or on the Drawings, and compatible

with intended use and shall meet at a minimum OCU standards. B. Valves shall have the name of the manufacturer and the size of the valve cast or molded

onto the valve body or bonnet or shown on a permanently stainless steel attached plate. C. Bolts, washers, nuts, and gaskets for flanged valves shall be as described in the specific

piping sections.

D. Coat metal valves located above ground or in vaults and structures the same as the adjacent piping. Apply the specified prime coat at the place of manufacture. Apply

15100-5

finish coat in field. Finish coat shall match the color of the adjacent piping. All prime and finish coats shall be in compliance with Division 9.

2.02 VALVE IDENTIFICATION

A. On all valves except shut-off valves located at a fixture or piece of equipment, the Contractor shall provide a coded and numbered tag attached with brass chain and/or brass "S" hooks.

1. Tag types

a. Tags for valves on pipe and tube lines in fluoride room shall be plastic. Tags for valves on pipe and tube lines elsewhere shall be brass or anodized aluminum.

b. Colors for aluminum tags shall, where possible, match the color code of the pipe line on which installed.

c. Square tags shall be used to indicate normally closed valves and round tags shall indicate normally open valves.

2. Coding: In addition to the color coding, each tag shall be stamped or engraved with

wording or abbreviations to indicate the line service. All color and letter coding shall be approved by the Engineer.

3. Manufacture: Tags shall be as manufactured by Seton Name Plate Corporation, Floy

Tag & Manufacturing Co. or approved equal.

4. Valve Schedule: the Contractor shall provide a typewritten list of all tagged valves giving tag color, shape, letter code and number, the valve size, type, use and general location within building.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install valves and accessories in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions and

recommendations, as shown on the Drawings and/or as directed by the Engineer. B. Carefully erect all valves and support them in their respective positions free from

distortion and strain. C. Bolt holes of flanged valves shall straddle the horizontal and vertical centerlines of the

pipe run to which the valves are attached. Clean flanges by wire brushing before installing flanged valves. Clean flange bolts and nuts by wire brushing, lubricate threads

15100-6

with oil and graphite, and tighten nuts uniformly and progressively. Clean threaded joints by wire brushing or swabbing. Apply Teflon joint compound or Teflon tape to pipe threads before installing threaded valves. Joints shall be watertight.

D. Support all valves connected to pumps and equipment, and in piping systems that cannot

support valves. E. Repair any scratches, marks and other types of surface damages, etc., with original prime

coating as supply by the factory. F. Apply finish coating in accordance with Division 9. 3.02 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Check and adjust all valves and accessories for smooth operation. B. Each side of each valve shall be tested for leaks in each direction. Test valves for

leakage at the same time that the connecting pipelines are tested. Protect or isolate any parts of valves, operators, or control and instrumentation systems whose pressure rating is less than the pressure tests.

C. If flanges leak under pressure testing, loosen or remove the nuts and bolts, reseat or

replace the gasket, reinstall or retighten the bolts and nuts, and retest the joints.

END OF SECTION

15101-1

SECTION 15101

GATE VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Scope of Work: 1. Furnish and install gate valves of the type and size and in the location as

shown on the Drawings and/or specified herein. B. General Design:

1. 2-inches and smaller, above ground, bronze pressure Class 125. 2. 2½ inches and larger, AWWA C509/C515 resilient wedge. 3. Comply with the requirements of Section 15100.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Qualifications: See Section 15100. B. Standards: See Section 15100. C. Warranty: See Sections 01740 and 15100. D. Equipment Manufacturers: Manufacturers shall be selected from one of the specified


1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 15100. B. For each type of valve: Certification that products comply with NSF 61.

1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Product delivery, storage and handling shall be in accordance with

Section 15100.

15101-2

1.05 SPECIAL TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS A. General: Provide special tools in accordance with Section 15100. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. General: Valves shall comply with PART 2 - Products of Section 15100. 2.02 MATERIALS A. General Service - 2-inches and smaller, above ground:

1. Bronze construction, Lead Free – Class 125.

2. Union bonnet.

3. Inside screw, non-rising stem.

4. Solid disc, taper wedge.

5. End connections: a. Threaded b. Or solder ends for copper pipe systems

6. Malleable iron, or steel hand wheel.

B. General Service – 2½ inches through 24 inches:

1. Gate valves shall be resilient seat gate valves, manufactured to meet or exceed the requirements of AWWA C509/C515, latest revision. All valves are to be tested in strict accordance with AWWA C509/C515.

2. Valves 16-inches and larger shall be AWWA C515 resilient seated only (16-

inches through 24-inches no gearing required).

3. Valves shall have an unobstructed waterway equal to or greater than the full nominal diameter of the valve.

4. The minimum design working water pressure shall be minimum 250-psig.

5. The valve body, bonnet, and bonnet cover shall be cast iron ASTM A126,

Class B for C509 valves and ductile iron ASTM A536 for C515 valves. All

15101-3

ferrous surface inside and outside shall have a fusion-bonded epoxy coating in accordance with AWWA C550.

6. 2-inch wrench nut shall be provided for operating the valve. Side actuated

gate valves are not acceptable. All valves shall open left or counter clockwise.

7. Non-rising stem, made of cast, forged or rolled bronze as specified in

AWWA C509. Two stem seals shall be provided and shall be of the o-ring type. The stem nut shall be independent of the gate.

8. Ductile iron gate with vulcanized EPDM synthetic rubber coating (resilient

seated). Zero leakage at test and normal working pressure when installed with the line flow from either direction.

9. Valves for buried service shall have mechanical joints conforming to ANSI

A21.11, above ground service joints shall be flanged conforming to ANSI B16.1 for Class 125 flanges.

10. Tapping valves shall be placed vertical where possible. When tapping

existing mains and vertical installation is not possible, valves 24-inches and above shall be furnished with NPT pipe plugs for flushing the tracks. Plugs shall be removed and valves and piping permanently installed to grade to allow flushing of the tracks.

C. General Service - Greater than 24 inches: Valves shall meet the requirements of 2.01

and 2.02.B except as specified otherwise below:

1. Operator shall be spur geared. 2. If required to be installed in horizontal installations, valves shall be equipped

with bevel gear suitable for burled service. Provide NPT pipe plugs for flushing the tracks. Plugs shall be removed and valves and piping permanently installed to grade to allow flushing of the tracks.

3. Valves 42-inch and greater shall be provided with by-pass gate valve.

D. Fire Service – 2 inches through 12 inches: Valves shall meet the requirements of 2.01 and 2.02.B except as specified otherwise below:

1. Outside screw-and-yoke (OS&Y) rising stems for above ground applications.

Non-rising stem for buried service and compatible with industry standard indicator posts (NFPA 24).

2. UL listed and FM approved.

15101-4

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install valves and accessories in strict accordance with manufacturer's instruction and

recommendations as shown on the Drawings

B. Install valves with stem position vertical, unless shown otherwise. C. Allow sufficient clearance around valve operator for proper operation. D. Install in accordance with "Valve and Specialties - General" Section 15100. E. If proposed grades do not allow for proper cover of buried valve/valve stem, inform

the Engineer in writing immediately. Contractor shall lower pipe and valve to allow for proper cover, if directed by the Engineer.

F. All buried gate valves shall be connected using restrained joints.

3.02 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Check and adjust all valves and accessories for smooth operation.

B. Test valves for leakage at the same time that connecting pipelines are tested. Protect or isolate any parts of valves, operators, or control and instrument systems whose pressure rating is less than the pressure tests.

END OF SECTION

15103-1

SECTION 15103

BUTTERFLY VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Scope of Work: Furnish and install butterfly valves of the type and size and in the location as shown on the Drawings and/or specified herein.

B. General Design:

1. 3-inches and larger, iron body bronze mounted. 2. Butterfly valves shall be fully operational and disc shall not interfere with

adjacent piping/fittings. 3. Comply with the requirements of Section 15100.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Comply with Section 15100. B. Standards: Comply with Section 15100. C. Warranty: Comply with Sections 01740 and 15100. D. Equipment Manufacturers:

1. Comply with Section 15100. 2. Valves shall be manufactured by:

a. Henry Pratt Co. b. Dezurik c. Clow

1.03 SUBMITTALS

Submittals be in accordance with Section 15100. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

Product delivery, storage and handling shall be in accordance with Section 15100.

15103-2

1.05 SPECIAL TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS

Provide special tools in accordance with Section 15100. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Valves shall meet applicable parts of Section 15100. B. AWWA Water Service: (Potable)

1. Equal or exceed requirements of AWWA C-504, Class 150B for frequent operation. Conform to Underwriters' Laboratories classification in accordance with ANSI/NSF 61.

2. Suitable for direct burial when required. 3. Bubble-tight shutoff at 150 psi working pressure. 4. Body: Cast or ductile iron ASTM - A126, Class B. 5. Disc: Bronze, cast iron, ductile iron, Ni-resist per manufacturer's standard

and valve size. Disc shall not interfere with adjacent piping when operated. 6. Valve Shaft: Valves shafts shall be turned, ground and polished, constructed

of 18-8 stainless steel and in compliance with AWWA C504 and designed for both torsional and sheering stresses when the valve is operated under its greatest dynamic or seating torque. Shaft shall be of either a one-piece unit extending full size through the valve disc and valve bearing or it may be of a stub shaft design as applicable.

7. Valve Seat: Natural or synthetic rubber or elastomer material as described in

AWWA C504. The valve seats shall be field adjustable and replaceable without dismounting operator disc or shaft and without removing the valve from the line. All retaining segments and adjusting devices shall be of corrosion resistant material.

8. Bearings: Shaft bearings shall be of self-lubricating corrosion resistant sleeve

type as specified in AWWA C504. 9. Valve connections shall be as shown on the Drawings or generally as follows:

Acceptable Valve Connections:

15103-3

a. Ground buried: Mechanical joints, restrained where shown on the

Drawings, ANSI A21.11. Where used in existing steel piping, valves shall be flanged.

b. Exposed: Flanged (125 lb. standard), ANSI B16.1, valve neck length

shall be sufficient to allow for flange clearance.

10. Testing: All valves shall be hydrostatic and leak tested in accordance with AWWA C504.

11. Working pressure: 150 psi unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 12. Operator: a. Ground buried: Wrench nut (two-inch), T-handle wrench, valve box

with cover for valves 6 inches in diameter or smaller. Worm gear (AWWA C504), wrench nut, T-handle wrench valve box with cover for valves 8 inches in diameter and greater.

b. Exposed: Lever activator with infinite lockable positioning capability standard on 6-inch and smaller valves, and worm gear with handwheel for valves 8 inches in diameter or greater.

13. Internal and external surfaces shall be shop painted with two (2) coats of

asphalt varnish (4 mils per coat) except for bearing surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and Section 15100.

END OF SECTION

15110-1

SECTION 15110

CHECK VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Scope of Work: Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required, and

install and test check valves including all appurtenances required as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Comply with Section 15100. B. Standards: Comply with Section 15100. C. Warranty: Comply with Sections 01740 and 15100. D. Equipment Manufacturers: Manufacturers shall be selected from one of the specified


1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submittals be in accordance with Section 15100. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: Shall be in accordance with

Section 15100. 1.05 SPECIAL TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS: Provide special tools in accordance with Section

15100. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Check Valves, 2-1/2 inches and smaller:

1. Valves for water service (not chemical service) shall be all bronze construction with screwed ends.

2. Minimum valve working pressure shall be 150 psi.

15110-2

3. Valves shall be as manufactured by American Flow 52SC, Mueller MA 2600, or equal.

B. Cushioned Check Valves (potable water high service pumping and high pressure

effluent application greater than 50 psi):

1. All materials of construction shall be as follows:

Description Material Specification Disc seat ring Aluminum Bronze ASTM B271 Body and cap Cast Iron ASTM A126, Class B Disc Aluminum Bronze ASTM B148 Pivot Pin Aluminum Bronze ASTM B505 Body Flange Bolt Carbon Steel SAE Grade 5

2. Check valves shall be of the Tilted Disc metal seated, full body type capable

of accepting optional bottom or top mounted oil dashpots. 3. The valves shall be provided with drilled flanges in accordance with ANSI

B16.1 for Class 125 or Class 250 iron flanges and ANSI B16.42 for Class 150 ductile iron flanges. Iron flanges shall be flat faced.

4 Flanged inspection ports shall be provided upstream and downstream of the

valve disc for inspection or use with optional dashpots on 6 inches and larger valves.

5. The valve body shall consist of two sections bolted together as a central

diagonal flange inclined at an angle of 55 degrees. The inlet body section shall contain a seat ring positioned and captured by the diagonal flange. The outlet body section shall accept eccentrically located pivot pin trunnions with sealed covers and lubrication grease fittings.

6. The eccentric pivot trunnions shall be located to divide the disc into

approximately 1/3 and 2/3 proportions and also allow the seating surface of the disc to rotate away from the seating surface of the seat ring without contact. Clearance shall be provided between the pivot pin and bushing when the disc is seated to prevent binding and to ensure a tight seal. The minimum pivot pin diameter shall be as shown below.

7. The flow area through the valve body inlet and outlet shall be equal to the

nominal pipe size and gradually increase to an area 40 percent greater at the valve seat.

8. A position indicator shall be supplied on 6-inches and larger valves and

visually show disc position at all times.

15110-3

9. The valve disc and seat shall have a seating surface finish of 32 micro-inches

or better to ensure positive seating at all pressure. The leakage rate shall not exceed one-half of the allowable rate allowed by AWWA Standard C508 or 0.5 oz (15 ml) per hour per inch (mm) of valve size.

10. 6-inches and larger valves should be capable of accepting a field installed

Top Mounted Oil Dashpot. 11. The valve flow way shall be contoured and unrestricted to provide full flow

areas at all locations within the valve. Full flow shall be based on an open stroke of 40 degrees to assure stabilization of the disc when open. Cv flow coefficients shall be equal to or greater than specified below and verified by an independent testing laboratory.

12. The valve body shall be constructed of ASTM A126 Class B cast iron for

Class 125 and Class 250 valves up to 10-inches (250mm). 12-inches (300mm) and larger Class 250 and Class 150 valves shall be constructed of ductile iron ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12.

13. The disc in sizes up to 10-inches (250mm) shall be one piece construction

with integral seat and constructed of ASTM B271 Alloy C95400 aluminum bronze. 12-inches (300mm) and larger shall be ASTM A-125 Class B cast iron. Discs furnished for 12-inches (300mm) and larger valves with top oil dashpots shall be constructed of ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron. The disc seating ring shall be ASTM B271 Alloy C95500 centrifugally cast aluminum bronze. The matting seat ring located in the body shall be ASTM B271 Alloy C95400 centrifugally cast aluminum bronze.

14. The pivot pins shall be ASTM B505 Alloy C95500 aluminum bronze and

shall be guided by a bushing constructed of ASTM B505 Alloy C95400 aluminum bronze (12-inches and larger valves).

15. A top mounted oil dashpot shall be factory installed in the downstream

inspection port when specified to provide independent hydraulic control of the valve opening and closing strokes to reduce water hammer normally associated with pump operation. The dashpot shall consist of a high pressure hydraulic cylinder with a minimum bore size as shown below and with internal cushion adjustment, two external flow control valves, a pressurized oil reservoir with a minimum size as shown below, a stainless steel non-pressurized reservoir and piping. The unit shall independently control the opening and closing stroke in the range of 5-30 seconds. Additionally, the closing stroke shall be two-stage with the last 10% of closing travel dampened with the internal cylinder cushion. A dashpot spacer which connects the cylinder to the valve shall have an air gap to prevent hydraulic

15110-4

fluid from entering the valve and contaminating the water system. A connecting rod with a minimum diameter as shown below and fitted with O-ring seals and rod wiper scrapers shall be linked to an integrally cast clevis on the disc. The connecting rod shall be attached to the cylinder rod with a quick change coupling constructed of 17-4 PH stainless steel. The cylinder rod, connecting rod, and coupling shall be held in place by coupling retainer to allow decoupling of the cylinder while the check valve is under pressure.

VALVE SIZE (in): 6 8-10 12-14 16-18 20-24 30 26-42 48-60 Cylinder Size (in): 2.5 3.25 4 5 6 7 8 10 Reservoir Size (gal): 0.1 0.3 6 1.1 2.5 6 6 10 Rod Diameter (in): 1 1.375 1.75 2 2.5. 3.5 4 5

16. The valves shall be hydrostatically tested at 1.5 times their rated cold working

pressure. Additional tests shall be conducted per AWWA, ANSI, MSS or API standards when specified. When requested, the manufacturer shall provide test certificates, dimensional drawings, parts list drawings, and operation and maintenance manuals.

The exterior of the valve shall be coated with a universal alkyd primer. The

valve interior shall be coated with an epoxy coating approved for potable water.

17. Check Valves shall be Tilted Disc Series 9000T with top oil dashpot as

manufactured by Val-Matic® Valve & Mfg. Corporation, Elmhurst, IL USA, or approved equal.

C. Swing Check Valves (well pumping)

1. Swing check valves shall conform to AWWA C508.

2. The valve body shall be 2-piece cast iron conforming to ASTM A126 with flanged ends conforming to ANSI B16.1. The area throughout the valve body shall be equal to the full pipe area.

3. The valve disc shall be ductile iron with bronze or resilient seating face. The disc shall be partially balanced with a short travel to resist slamming.

4. The seat ring and disc ring shall be ASTM B763 Alloy 84400 bronze, with beveled edges, firmly clamped or screwed into the valve body. Seat rings and disc rings shall be field replaceable.

5. The hinge pin shall be of stainless steel with bronze bushings, allow free movement of the disc without binding, and shall be guaranteed not to stick in the closed position.

15110-5

6. The valve shall be designed for a minimum working pressure of 150-psi.

7. Valves shall be supplied with an outside lever and adjustable weight.

8. Provide limits switch and accessories.

9. Valves 4-inches and larger shall be 8-mil epoxy lined. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: Install valves in accordance with Section 15100 and the manufacturer's

instructions. 3.02 DEMONSTRATION AND TESTING: Demonstration, start-up (adjustment) and testing

shall demonstrate that all valves have been properly installed and that check valves operate properly.

END OF SECTION

15116-1

SECTION 15116

VALVE BOXES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK: Furnish and install valve boxes of type and size and in the location

shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: See Section 15100. B. Standards: All curb boxes shall be the product of one manufacturer. C. Warranty: See Sections 01740 and 15100. D. Equipment Manufacturers: Manufacturers shall be selected from one of the specified


1.03 SPECIAL TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS A. General: Provide special tools in accordance with Section 15100. B. Provide ten (10) special wrenches. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. All buried valves shall have cast iron, three (3) piece valve boxes. Valve boxes shall

be provided with suitable heavy bonnets and to extend to such elevation at or slightly above the finished grade surface as directed by the Engineer.

B. The barrel shall be screw type, having 5-1/4 inch diameter shaft. The upper section

shall have a flange at the bottom having sufficient bearing area to prevent settling and shall be complete with cast iron covers.

C. Covers shall have "WATER" cast into the top for all water mains and "SEWER" cast

into the top of all wastewater force mains and "REUSE" cast into the top of all reclaimed water mains.

D. All valves shall have actuating nuts extended to top of valve boxes.

15116-2

E. Valve box assemblies are required for any size main that is six feet or greater below

finished grade or if mains are greater than 12-inches in diameter. The valve box assembly shall be one complete unit composed of the valve box and extension stem that attaches to the valve body. All moving parts of the extension stem shall be enclosed in a housing to prevent contact with the soil. The valve box assembly shall be adjustable to accommodate variable trench depths six feet and greater as shown on the Drawings.

F. The stem assembly shall be of a telescoping design that allows for variable

adjustment length. The material shall be galvanized square steel tubing. The stem assembly shall have a built-in device that prevents the stem assembly from disengaging at its fully extended length. The extension stem shall be capable of surviving a torque test to 1,000 ft-lb without failure.

G. Valve boxes shall have locking lids, utilizing a five sided nut with a special wrench

needed to open. Valve lids shall be as shown on the Drawings. H. Valve collars shall be made of a fiberglass reinforced concrete polymer material

manufactured to the specifications as shown on the Drawings utilizing a test station box made into the valve collar for placement of the locating wire. The locating wire shall be 10-gauge single strand solid core copper wire with insulation. The color of the insulation shall be the same color as the color code for the pipe being installed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install as shown on the Drawings and/or as directed by the Engineer. B. When installation is complete, no pressure shall be exerted by the valve box on either

the valve or the pipe.

END OF SECTION

15118-1

SECTION 15118

BACKFLOW PREVENTION DEVICE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Scope of Work: Furnish and install a backflow prevention device of the type, size,

and capacity and in the location shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. General Design: Comply with the requirements of Section 15100. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Qualifications: See Section 15100. B. Standards: See Section 15100. C. Warranty: See Sections 01740 and 15100. D. Equipment Manufacturers: 1. CLA-VAL 2. Watts 3. Hersey 4. Engineer Approved Equal

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submittals be in accordance with Section 15100. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. General: Product delivery, storage and handling shall be in accordance with Section 15100.

B. Submit information of company to be performing certification per paragraph 3.04. C. Submit copy of certification and test results per paragraph 3.01.

1.05 SPECIAL TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS

A. General: Provide special tools in accordance with Section 15100.

15118-2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. General: Valve shall comply with Section 15100 and meet local Building Code requirements.

B. The main valve body shall be cast iron with epoxy coated interior, main valve trim

shall be bronze ASTM B-61 and stainless steel 316. 2.02 DESIGN

A. General: Valve shall comply with Section 15100 and meet local building code requirements.

B. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventer:

1. Backflow preventers shall be of the reduced pressure type with two independently operating check valves.

2. An independent pressure relief valve shall be located between the two check

valves. 3. The unit shall include tightly closing shut-off valves located at each end of

the device, and shall be fitted with properly located test cocks.

4. All internal parts of the check valves and pressure relief valve must be removable or replaceable without removal of the unit from the line.

5. The total head loss through the complete backflow assembly shall not

exceed 10 psi. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with Section 15100, the manufacturer's recommendations and as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Check-Out and Demonstration testing shall be provided in accordance with

Division 1. C. Installation shall be certified: Notify RPR to observe testing. Submit copy of test

results and certification per paragraph 1.04.C.

END OF SECTION

15120-1

SECTION 15120

PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: This section includes materials and installation of the miscellaneous

piping specialties. B. Related Work Described Elsewhere:

1. Pressure Testing of Piping: Section 15044. 2. Chemical Feed System Piping: Section 15090. 3. Valves and Appurtenances: Section 15100.

C. General Design:

1. Comply with Section 15100, Article 1.01.B.1, 2 and 3.

2. Specialties shall have a working pressure rating equal to or greater than the piping installed in.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Comply with Section 15100. B. Standards: Comply with Section 15100. C. Warranty: Comply with Section 01740 and 15100. D. Equipment Manufacturers: See PART 2. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 15100. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:

A. Product delivery, storage and handling shall be in accordance with Section 15100. 1.05 SPECIAL TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS A. Provide special tools in accordance with Section 15100.

15120-2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SOLENOID VALVES FOR WATER SERVICE A. Solenoid valves shall be design for not less than 150 psi water working pressure and

shall be installed where shown. Electrical operators for solenoid valves shall be in accordance with electrical drawings. Valves shall be two-way pattern, screwed, brass-body type, ASCO No. 8210 through 8223.

2.02 TAPPING VALVES AND SLEEVES

A. Tapping Valves shall be resilient seat gate valves. Tapping valves manufacturer shall be selected from one of the specified "Manufacturers" in the Orange County Utilities "List of Materials and Approved Manufacturers" as presented in an appendix of these technical specifications.

B. Tapping sleeve shall be mechanical joint; with tapping valves which outlet to a

flanged connection for the above ground applications, and outlet to a mechanical joint connection for buried pipe taps. Exact O.D. of pipe to be tapped shall be field measured prior to ordering sleeve. Tapping sleeves manufacturer shall be selected from one of the specified "Manufacturers" in the Orange County Utilities "List of Materials and Approved Manufacturers" as presented in an appendix of these technical specifications.

C. For wastewater applications, provide additional plug valve after tapping valve after

the tap is completed.

2.03 FIRE HYDRANTS AND VALVE ASSEMBLIES

A Fire hydrants shall be 5-1/4-inch minimum valve opening and shall comply with the current AWWA Standard Specifications C502-54 for 150-psi working pressure. Fire hydrants shall be of ample length for 3-1/2-foot depth of bury with necessary extensions to place safety flange the required 3-inches above concrete slab at the finished grade. Each hydrant shall be made in at least 2 sections bolted together. All interior working parts shall be removable form the top of the hydrant to allow repairs without removing the hydrant barrel. Provide two (2) 2-1/2-inch hose nozzles and one (1) 4-1/2-inch pumper nozzle, all having its specific Fire District Standard hose threads. All nozzles shall have caps attached by chains. Operating nuts shall be AWWA Standard. Drain or weep holes shall be permanently plugged by the manufacturer.

B. Fire hydrant painting and coating shall meet the requirements of Orange County

standards. Fire hydrants shall be painted silver in accordance with the present Orange County standards. Provide one (1) operating wrench.

15120-3

C. All hydrant assemblies shall incorporate anchoring hydrant fittings, including M.J. Locked Hydrant Tee with split gland to provide the locking together of the entire assembly. Gate valve shall be as specified in Specification Section 15111 Gate Valves.

D. All hydrants shall have a 24-inch to 48-inch square by 6-inch thick reinforced

concrete shear paid as shown in the Drawings. E. Fire hydrants shall be located in the general location as shown on the Drawings. Final

field location of all hydrants shall be as approved by the Owner. All hydrants shall be located no less than 5 and no more than 10-feet from the edge of pavement of the adjacent roadway and no less than 5-feet from any physical feature which may obstruct access or view of any hydrant unless otherwise approved by the Owner.

F. Manufacturer shall be selected from one of the specified "Manufacturers" in the

Orange County Utilities "List of Materials and Approved Manufacturers" as presented in an appendix of these technical specifications.

2.04 CORPORATION STOPS

A. Corporation stops shall be threaded on the inlet side and the outlet side fitted with connections to suit connecting pipe or tubing.

B. Manufacturer shall be selected from one of the specified "Manufacturers" in the


2.05 CURB STOPS

A. Curb stops shall be ball type. B. Manufacturer shall be selected from one of the specified "Manufacturers" in the


2.06 QUICK CONNECT COUPLINGS FOR WATER SERVICE A. Quick connect coupling shall be stainless steel construction. Quick connect couplings

shall be Model 633-F hose shank adapter and Model 633-C hose shank coupler as manufactured by Dover Corporation OPW Division, Cincinnati, Ohio, equal by Ever-tite Coupling Co., Inc., New York, New York or equal.

15120-4

2.07 QUICK CONNECT COUPLINGS FOR CHEMICAL SERVICE

A. Quick connect couplings for Chemical Service shall be male adaptor/female thread type. Provide dust cap and security chain with each coupler. Bodies shall be glass fiber reinforced polypropylene. Gaskets shall be Teflon. Adaptors shall be Ever-tite Coupling Co. Port A/DC, Banjo Corporation Male Adapter/Female Thread with dust cap, Murray Equipment Inc., Style A/DC, or equal.

2.08 SERVICE SADDLES

A. Service saddles shall be of the double-strap type. Straps and bodies shall be bronze or silicon bronze. Tap sizes on the outlet shall be 3/4-inch through 2 inches to accommodate the connecting piping or corporation stops.

B. Manufacturer shall be selected from one of the specified "Manufacturers" in the


2.10 STRAINERS FOR WATER SERVICE A. Strainers shall be installed as shown on the Drawings and shall be of the "Y" type.

Strainers shall have bronze bodies with a removable bronze screen and shall be as manufactured by Mueller Steam, Mineola, New York, Watts Regulator Company, Lawrence, Mass., or equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install piping specialties of the sizes and types in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, and in the locations shown on the Drawings or specified herein.

B. Notification and Connections to Existing Mains 1. The Contractor shall submit a completed "System Connection" form to the

Owner to schedule the connection. The request shall be made a minimum of 5-working days prior to the proposed tie-in to the existing main for pressure connections and 10-working days prior to the proposed tie-in to the existing main for non-pressure connections. In this request, the Contractor shall provide the following information: a. Points of connection, fittings to be used and method of flushing and

disinfection if applicable b. Estimated construction time for said connections

15120-5

c. Identify pressure and non-pressure connections 2. Connections shall only be made on the agreed upon date and time. If the

Contractor does not perform the Work in the agreed upon manner or schedule, the Contractor shall be required to reschedule the connection by following the procedure outlined above.

C. Pressure Connections: Sufficient length of main shall be exposed to allow for

installation of the tapping sleeve and valve and the operation of the tapping machinery. The main shall be supported on concrete pedestals or bedding rock at sufficient intervals to properly carry its own weight, plus the weight of the tapping sleeve, valve and machinery. Any damage to the main due to improper or insufficient supports will be repaired at the Contractor's expense.

1. Prior to the tap, the Contractor shall assemble all materials, tools, equipment,

labor, and supervision necessary to make the connection. 2. The Contractor shall excavate a dry and safe working area pit of sufficient

size to enable the necessary Work. 3. The inside of the tapping sleeve and valve, the outside of the main and the

tapping machine shall be cleaned and swabbed or sprayed with 1% liquid chlorine solution prior to beginning installation for water system pressure connections and must comply with AWWA C-651-99 or most current version.

4. After the tapping sleeve has been mounted on the main, the tapping valve

shall be bolted to the outlet flange, making a pressure tight connection. Prior to beginning the tapping operation, the sleeve and valve shall be pressure tested under the observation of Owner’s RPR to 150-psi for 30-minute duration to ensure that no leakage will occur.

5. For pressure connections 4-inch through 20-inch installation, the minimum

diameter cut shall be 1/2-inch less than the nominal diameter of the pipe to be attached. For larger taps, the allowable minimum diameter shall be 2 to 3-inches less than the nominal diameter of the pipe being attached. After the tapping procedure is complete, the Contractor shall submit the coupon to the Owner.

6. The tapping valve shall be placed horizontally for pressure connections to

wastewater force mains. A plug valve shall be attached to the tapping valve after the tapping procedure is complete. The tapping valve shall be left in the open position prior to backfilling.

7. Adequate restrained joint fittings shall be provided to prevent movement of

15120-6

the installation when test pressure is applied.

8. The Contractor shall be responsible for properly backfilling the work area pit after the Work is completed.

F. Non-Pressure Dry Connections

1. For water service connections, no customer shall be without service for more than 6-hours. For wastewater connections, provide bypass operations per Section 01516 "Collection System Bypass." This accommodation to customers may include scheduling after Normal Working Hours.

2. The Contractor shall be ready to proceed by pre-assembling as much material

as possible at the site to minimize the length of service interruption. 4. Needed pipe restraints must be installed prior to the initiation of the

shutdown. 5. The excavation shall be opened and needed site preparations must be

completed before the initiation of the connection work.

6. County shall postpone a service cut-off if the Contractor is not ready to

proceed at the scheduled time. 6. Only County personnel shall operate the valves needed to perform the

shutdown on the existing system.

END OF SECTION

15122-1

SECTION 15122

AIR RELEASE AND VACUUM RELEASE VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Scope of Work: This section includes materials and installation of various types of

air and vacuum valves and air release valves for water service and sewage service. B. General Design:

1. Valves shall have a working pressure rating of 150 psi, minimum. 2. Combination air/vacuum valves shall vent large quantities of air when the

pipeline is filling, release small quantities of air when the pipeline is pressurized and allow reentry of air into the pipeline when pumps stop to prevent vacuum. Air release valves shall vent small quantities of air while the pipeline is pressurized.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: All air and vacuum release valves, for the same service, shall be

manufactured by one manufacturer and shall be in accordance with Section 15100. B. Warranty: See Section 01740 and 15100. C. Equipment Manufacturers: Manufacturers shall be selected from one of the specified


1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submittals be in accordance with Section 15100. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: Shall be in accordance with

Division 1. 1.05 SPECIAL TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS

A. Provide special tools in accordance with Section 15100.

B. Provide one (1) spare air release and vacuum release valve for each size and type provided.

15122-2

PART 2 - PRODUCT 2.01 MATERIALS A. Clean Water Service (Final Effluent) (Reuse Water) (Potable Water) All air release and vacuum release valves shall be isolated from the service line with

a bronze gate valve for valves up to 3 inches, and a flanged body butterfly valve for valves greater than 3 inches (provide a spacer plate if required to clear the rotation of the butterfly disc).

1. Air Valves (ARV) a. 3/4-inch and smaller: (1) Direct acting type or simple lever type. (2) Cast iron body with stainless steel float, Buna N seat, and

stainless steel linkage. (3) Apco No. 55 (1/2"), No. 65 (3/4"), Val-Matic 1/2” or 3/4” No.

22.4, or approved equal. b. 1-inch and larger: (1) Float actuated compound lever type with linkage mechanism

to release air. (2) Float shall withstand external pressure of without collapsing

and leaks at twice the service pressure. (3) The valve body shall be 316 SS. Valve shall include

polyethylene float, bronze water diffuser, Buna-N or Viton seat with stainless steel trim.

(4) Fittings from the main to the air release valve shall be threaded and made of brass.

(5) Polyethylene float with 316 SS linkage and Buna-N or Viton seat/needle.

(6) Manufacturers shall be selected from one of the specified "Manufacturers" in the Orange County Utilities "List of Materials and Approved Manufacturers" as presented in appendix of these technical specifications.

2. Air and Vacuum Valves (not intended for use on potable water service) a. General: Float assembly and large venting orifice to exhaust large

quantities of air, or admit large quantities of air. (1) Cast iron body with flanged top containing air release orifice. (2) Float shall rise with the water level in the valve body to close

the orifice by sealing against a synthetic rubber seal. (3) Float shall withstand and external pressure of 1000 psig

without collapsing.

15122-3

(4) Designs having levers and weights attached to the float will not be permitted.

(5) Float shall have one-piece guide rod extending out of the bottom and to engage the guide bushings in the valve body at all times.

(6) Cast iron body and cover with stainless steel float, guide rod and bushings with Buna-N seat.

b. Three (3) inches and smaller: (1) 1/2-inch threaded outlet and bronze plug for top cover and

body drain. (2) Apco No. Series 140, Val-Matic No. 100, or equal. c. Larger than 3 inches: (1) 1-inch threaded drain outlet and bronze plug. (2) 1-inch threaded outlet with bronze plug on the side of the

valve body above the minimum water level in the valve, which forces the float against the valve seat.

(3) Steel protector hood. (4) Manufacturers shall be selected from one of the specified


3. Combination Air Release Valves (not intended for use on potable water

service): a. Combination of 2.01, B, 1 and 2 above. The air and vacuum valve

serves to release and admit large quantities of air when the pipeline is filled or drained. The attached air release valve serves to release small quantities of air that accumulate during pipeline operation.

b. Connect attached air release valve to air and vacuum valve with standard weight steel piping (ANSI B36.10) and an isolation gate valve.

4. Well Service Air Valve a. Well service air valves shall be fully automatic float operated valves

designed to exhaust air which is present in the pump column on pump startup and allow air to re-enter the column on pump shutdown or should a negative pressure occur. The dual port throttling device (3-inch and smaller valves) shall provide adjustable control of the exhaust rate and allow free flow into the valve through a separate inlet port.

b. Valves shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with AWWA Standard C512. Valves used in potable water service shall be certified in ANSI/NSF 61 Drinking Water System Components.

15122-4

c. Valves sizes 3-inch and smaller shall have full size NPT inlets and outlets equal to the nominal valve size. The body inlet connection shall be hexagonal for a wrench connection.

d. The valve shall have two (2) additional NPT connections for the addition of air release valves, gauges, testing, and draining.

e. The valve body shall provide a through flow area equal to the nominal valve size. A bolted cover with alloy screws and flat gasket shall be provided to allow for maintenance and repair.

f. Floats shall be unconditionally guaranteed against failure including pressure surges. The float shall have a hexagonal guide shaft supported in the body by circular bushings to prevent binding from debris. The float shall be protected against direct water impact by an internal baffle.

g. The resilient seat shall provide drop tight shut off to the full valve pressure rating. The seat shall be a minimum of .5-inches thick on 2-inch and larger valves and secured in such a manner as to prevent distortion.

h. Valves 3-inch and smaller will be equipped with a dual port throttling device to control the discharge of air from the valve and allow full vacuum flow through a separate port. The device shall have an externally adjustable screw and locknut for adjusting the discharge control disc. The disc shall be sized to allow a 5% flow area when fully throttled. The vacuum port shall be equipped with a spring loaded disc to allow flow into the valve during negative pressure conditions. Throttling devices with a common exhaust and vacuum port are not acceptable. The material of the body shall be consistent with the well service air valve. The spring shall be ASTM A313 Type 316 stainless steel.

i. The well service air valve body, cover, and baffle shall be constructed of ASTM A126 Class B cast iron for Class 125 and Class 250 valves.

j. the float, guide shafts, and bushings shall be constructed of Type 316 stainless steel. Non-metallic guides and bushings are not acceptable. Resilient seats shall be Buna-N.

k. The manufacturer shall demonstrate a minimum of five (5) years experience in the manufacture of air valves. When requested, the manufacturer shall provide test certificates, dimensional drawings, parts list drawings, and operation and maintenance manuals.

l. Well service air valves shall be Series 102ST as manufactured by Val-Matic and Manufacturing Corporation or approved equal.

C. Valve End Connections: 1. Valves smaller than 4 inches shall have threaded ends. Valves 4 inches and

larger shall have flanged ends.

15122-5

2. Flanges for Class 150 valves shall comply with ANSI B16.1, Class 125. Flanges for Class 300 valves shall comply with ANSI B16.1, Class 250.

3. Threaded ends shall comply with ANSI B2.1. D. Bolts and Nuts for Flanged Valves: 1. Bolts and nuts for flanged valves located indoors and in vaults and structures

shall be carbon steel, ASTM A-307, Grade B. 2. Bolts and nuts for flanged valves located outdoors above ground shall be

Type 316 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A-193, Grade B8M or bolts, and ASTM A-194, Grade 8M for nuts.

E. Gaskets: Gaskets for flanged end valves shall be as described in the detail piping

specifications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install valves in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and

recommendations and as shown on the Drawings. Direct tapping may be utilized in lieu of service saddles with ductile iron pipe for tapping sizes up to 1-inch tap size provided that the ductile iron pipe wall thickness will affect three full AWWA C-800 Standard threads.

B. Install all valves in the vertical position and allow sufficient clearance around valve

for proper maintenance and removal. C. Clean flanges by wire brushing before installing flanged valves. Clean flange bolts

and nuts by wire brushing, lubricate threads with oil and graphite, and tighten nuts uniformly and progressively. If flanges leak under pressure testing, loosen and remove the nuts and bolts, reseat or replace the gasket, reinstall or retighten the bolts and nuts, and retest the joints. Joints shall be watertight.

D. Clean threaded joints by wire brushing or swabbing. Apply Teflon joint compound

or Teflon tape to pipe threads before installing threaded valves. Joints shall be watertight.

E. Valve Pressure Testing: Test valves at the same time that the connecting pipelines

are pressure tested. Protect or isolate any part of valves, operators, or control and instrumentation systems whose pressure rating is less than the test pressure.

15122-6

F. Provide enclosure for all below ground valves per the Drawings. 3.02 STARTUP: Check-out all valves and demonstrate all valves for proper operation in

accordance with Division 1.

END OF SECTION

15126-1

SECTION 15126

PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: 1. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals and install pipe

hangers, supports, concrete inserts, and anchor bolts including all metallic hanging and supporting devices for supporting exposed piping.

B. Related Work Described Elsewhere: 1. Concrete is included in Division 3. 2. Metal fabrications are included in Section 05120. 3. Painting is included in Section 09900. 4. Pipe and fittings are included in respective sections of Division 15. C. General Design (Not Applicable) 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Hangers and supports shall be of approved standard design where possible and

shall be adequate to maintain the supported load in proper position under all operating conditions. The minimum working factor of safety for pipe supports shall be five (5) times the ultimate tensile strength of the material, assuming 10 feet of water filled pipe being supported.

B. All pipe and appurtenances connected to equipment shall be supported in such a

manner as to prevent any strain being imposed on the equipment. When manufacturers have indicated requirements that piping loads shall not be transmitted to their equipment, the Contractor shall submit a certification stating that such requirements have been complied with.

15126-2

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Materials and Shop Drawings: 1. Submit to the Engineer for approval, as provided in the General

Conditions and Section 01340, shop drawings of all items to be furnished under this Section.

2. Submit to the Engineer, for approval, samples of all materials specified

herein. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. The equipment provided under this section shall be shipped, handled and stored in accordance with the Manufacturer’s written instructions, and in accordance with Section 01600 - Material and Equipment.


Bonds. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All pipe and tubing shall be supported as required to prevent significant stresses in

the pipe or tubing material, valves, and fittings and to support and cure the pipe in the intended position and alignment. All supports shall be designed to adequately secure the pipe against excessive dislocation due to thermal expansion and contraction, internal flow forces, and all probable external forces such as equipment, pipe, and personnel contact. All pipe supports shall be approved prior to installation.

B. The Contractor shall select and design all piping support systems within the

specified spans and component requirements. Structural design and selection of support system components shall withstand the dead loads imposed by the weight of the pipes filled with water, plus any insulation. Commercial pipe supports and hangers shall have a minimum safety factor of 5.

C. No attempt has been made to show all required pipe supports in all locations,

either on the Drawings or in the details. The absence of pipe supports and details on any drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for providing them throughout the plant.

15126-3

D. All support anchoring devices, including anchor bolts, inserts and other devices

used to anchor the support onto a concrete base, roof, wall or structural steel works, shall be of the proper size, strength and spacing to withstand the shear and pullout loads imposed by loading and spacing on each particular support.

E. All materials used in manufacturing hangers and supports shall be capable of

meeting the respective ASTM Standard Specifications with regard to tests and physical and chemical properties, and be in accordance with MSS SP-58.

F. Hangers and supports shall be spaced in accordance with ANSI B31.1.0 except

that the maximum unsupported span shall not exceed 10 feet unless otherwise specified herein.

G. Unless otherwise specified herein, pipe hangers and supports shall be as

manufactured by Anvil International, Inc., Carpenter and Patterson, Inc., or equal. Any reference to a specific figure number of a specific manufacturer is for the purpose of establishing a type and quality of product, and shall not be considered as proprietary. Any item comparable in type, style, quality, design and performance will be considered for approval.

2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Pipe Hangers and Supports for Metal Pipe: 1. Suspended single pipes shall be supported by hangers suspended by Type

316 stainless steel - or corrosion resistant plastic where needed - rods from galvanized concrete inserts, beam clamps, or ceiling mounting bolts as follows:

a. Hangers Pipe Size, Inches Anvil Fig. No. Less than 1/2 138R 1/2 through 1 97C 1-1/4 through 4 104 6 through 12 590 14 through 30 171 b. Hanger rods shall be Type 316 stainless steel machine threaded

with load ratings conforming to ASTM Specifications and the strength of the rod shall be based on root diameter. Hanger rods shall have the following minimum diameters:

15126-4

Pipe Size, Inches Min. Rod Diameter, In. Less than 2-1/2 3/8 2-1/2 to 3 1/2 4 5/8 6 3/4 8 to 12 7/8 14 to 18 1 c. Where applicable, structural attachments shall be beam clamps.

Beam clamps, for rod sizes 1/2-inch through 3/4-inch shall be equal to Anvil Fig. No. 229, and for rod sizes 7/8-inch through 1-1/4 inches shall be equal to Anvil Fig. No. 228, or equal.

d. Concrete inserts for pipe hangers shall be; continuous metal inserts

designed to be used in ceilings, walls or floors, spot inserts for individual pipe hangers, or ceiling mounting bolts for individual pipe hangers and shall be as manufactured by Unistrut Corp., Wayne, Michigan; Carpenter and Patterson, Inc., Laconia, New Hampshire; Richmond or equal and shall be as follows:

i. Continuous concrete inserts shall be used where applicable

and/or as shown on the Drawings and shall be used for hanger rod sizes up to and including 3/4-inch diameter. Inserts to be used where supports are parallel to the main slab reinforcement shall be Series P3200 by Unistrut Corp., Fig 1480 Type 2 by Carpenter and Patterson, Inc., or equal. Inserts to be used where supports are perpendicular to the main slab reinforcement shall be Series P3300 by Unistrut Corp., Fig. 1480 Type I by Carpenter and Patterson, Inc. or equal.

ii. Spot concrete inserts shall be used where applicable and

shall be used for hanger sizes up to and including 7/8-inch diameter. Inserts shall be Fig. 650 by Carpenter and Patterson, Inc. for hanger rod sizes 1/2-inch through and including 3/4-inch, and Fig. 266 by Carpenter and Patterson Inc., for 7/8-inch hanger rods.

iii. Ceiling mounting bolts shall be used where applicable and

be for hanger rod sizes l-inch through and including 1-1/4 inches and shall be Fig. 104M as manufactured by Carpenter and Patterson, Inc., or equal.

15126-5

e. All pipe hangers shall be capable of vertical adjustment under load and after erection. Turnbuckles, as required and where applied, shall be equal to Anvil Fig. No. 230.

2. Wall or column supported pipes shall be supported by welded steel

brackets equal to Anvil Fig. 194, 195 and 199 as required, for pipe sizes up to and including 20-inch diameter. Additional wall bearing plates shall be provided where required.

a. Where the pipe is located above the bracket, the pipe shall be

supported by an anchor chair and U-bolt assembly supported by the bracket for pipes 4 inches and larger and by a U-bolt for pipes smaller than 4 inches. Anchor chairs shall be equal to Carpenter Patterson Fig. No. 127. U-bolts shall be equal to Anvil Fig. No. 120 and 137.

b. Where the pipe is located below the bracket, the pipes shall be

supported by pipe hangers suspended by steel rods from the bracket. Hangers and steel rods shall be as specified above.

3. Floor supported pipes 3-inches and larger in diameter shall be supported

by either cast-in-place concrete supports or adjustable pipe saddle supports as directed by the Engineer. In general, concrete supports shall be used when lateral displacement of the pipes is probable (unless lateral support is provided), and adjustable pipe saddle type supports shall be used where later displacement of pipes is not probable.

a. Each concrete support shall conform to the details shown on the

Drawings. Concrete shall be poured after the pipe is in place with temporary supports. Concrete piers shall conform accurately to the bottom 1/3 to 1/2 of the pipe. Top edges and vertical corners of each concrete support shall have l-inch bevels. Each pipe shall be secured on each concrete support by a wrought iron or steel anchor strap anchored to the concrete with cast-in-place bolts or with expansion bolts. Where directed by the Engineer, vertical reinforcement bars shall be grouted into drilled holes in the concrete floor to prevent overturning or lateral displacement of the concrete support. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, maximum support height shall be five (5) feet.

b. Concrete piers used to support base elbows and tees shall be

similar to that specified above. Piers may be square or rectangular. c. Each adjustable pipe saddle support shall be screwed or welded to

the corresponding size 150 pound companion flanges or slip-on

15126-6

welding flanges respectively. Supporting pipe shall be of Schedule 40 steel pipe construction. Each flange shall be secured to the concrete floor by a minimum of two (2) expansion bolts per flange. Adjustable saddle supports shall be equal to Anvil Fig. No. 264. Where used under base fittings, a suitable flange shall be substituted for the saddle.

4. Vertical piping shall be supported as follows: a. Where pipes change from horizontal to vertical, the pipes shall be

supported on the horizontal runs within 2 feet of the change in direction by pipe supports as previously specified herein.

b. For vertical runs exceeding 15 feet, pipes shall be supported by

approved pipe collars, clamps, brackets, or wall rests at all points required to insure a rigid installation.

c. Where vertical piping passes through a steel floor sleeve, the pipe

shall be supported by a friction type pipe clamp which is supported by the pipe sleeve. Pipe clamps shall be equal to Anvil Fig. 262.

5. Anchor bolts shall be equal to Kwik-Bolt as manufactured by the

McCullock Industries, Minneapolis, Minnesota, or Wej-it manufactured by Wej-it Expansion Products, Inc., Bloomfield, Colorado.

6. All rods, hangers, inserts, brackets, and components shall be furnished

with galvanized finish. B. Pipe Hangers and Supports for Plastic Pipe: 1. Single plastic pipes shall be supported by pipe supports as previously

specified herein. 2. Multiple, suspended, horizontal plastic pipe runs, where possible, and

rubber hose shall be supported by ladder type cable trays such as the Electray Ladder by Husky-Burndy, the Globetray by the Metal Products Division of United States Gypsum, or equal. Ladder shall be of mild steel construction. Rung spacing shall be approximately 18 inches for plastic pipe and 12 inches for rubber hose. Tray width shall be approximately 6-inch for single runs of rubber hose and 12 inches for double runs of rubber hose. Ladder type cable trays shall be furnished complete with all hanger rods, rod couplings, concrete inserts, hanger clips, etc. required for a complete support system. Individual plastic pipes shall be secured to the rungs of the cable tray by strap clamps or fasteners equal to Globe Model M-CAC, Husky-Burndy Model SCR or approved equal. Spacing between

15126-7

clamps shall not exceed 9 feet. The cable trays shall provide continuous support along the length of the pipe.

3. Individual clamps, hangers, and supports in contact with plastic pipe shall

provide firm support but not so firm as to prevent longitudinal movement due to thermal expansion and contraction.

C. Pipe Supports for Small Diameter PVC and Steel Pipe: 1. Small diameter Schedule 80 PVC piping 3-inches in diameter and smaller,

and steel piping 2-inches in diameter and smaller shall be supported with "SUSPORT" system arrangements as manufactured by Universal Suspension Systems Inc. of Gillette, New Jersey or an equal approved by the Engineer. Clamping halves for the pipe support shall be manufactured of molded polypropylene and shall support and fit closely for 360° around the pipe. To support piping carrying non-corrosive fluids or gases and located in noncorrosive, indoor environments, all hardware for the "SUSPORT" system shall be nickel chrome plated carbon steel. To support piping carrying corrosive fluids or gases, piping located in corrosive environments or piping located outdoors, all hardware for the system shall be manufactured of Type 304 stainless steel.

2. In some cases, to adequately support small diameter PVC or steel piping, a

metal frame support structure may be required for support of the "SUSPORT" system specified above. Where required, metal frame support structures shall be constructed using channels, fittings, brackets, hardware and other accessories as manufactured by B-Line Systems, Inc. of Highland, Illinois, or an equal approved by the Engineer. If located in indoor, non-corrosive environments, the materials for the frame structure shall be carbon steel with an epoxy coating applied by a cathodic, electro-deposition process which is equal to "Dura-a-Green" by B-Line Systems, Inc. For corrosive or outdoor environments, the materials for the frame structure be Type 316 stainless steel unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. Hardware used to construct the frame support structure shall be cadmium plated for carbon steel supports or Type 316 stainless steel for stainless steel supports.

3. Pipe supports for small diameter PVC and steel piping shall have a

maximum spacing as specified below for straight pipe runs. Additional pipe supports shall be located where shown on the Drawings or at the direction of the Engineer wherever necessary in the opinion of the Engineer to adequately support the pipe. Adequate supports shall especially be used adjacent to valves and fittings in pipelines. The following table is based on spacing requirements for Schedule 80 PVC or Standard Weight (Schedule 40) steel pipe carrying a fluid with a Specific

15126-8

Gravity of 1.0 at a temperature not exceeding 120°F. Support spacing for PVC or steel piping carrying fluids with Specific Gravities or temperatures exceeding those stated above shall be approved by the Engineer.

Nominal Pipe

Diameter, Inches Support Spacing, Feet

PVC Pipe

Steel Pipe 1/2" 3.5 4.5 3/4" 4.0 5.0 1" 4.5 5.5

1-1/4" 5.0 6.5 1-1/2" 5.0 7.5

2" 5.5 8.0 2-1/2" 5.5 -

3" 6.0 - 2.03 ACCESSORIES (Not Applicable) 2.04 SPARE PARTS (Not Applicable) 2.05 QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor shall follow Manufacturer's and Supplier's recommended product

quality control specifics as required for this project. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. All pipe hangers and support (except stainless steel) shall be coated in accordance

with the following: B. Prior to prime coating, all pipe hangers and supports shall be thoroughly clean,

dry and free from all mill-scale, rust, grease, dirt, paint and other foreign substances to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

C. All submerged pipe supports shall be prime coated with Koppers 654 Epoxy

Primer or approved equal. All other pipe supports shall be prime coated with Rustinhibitive Primer No. 621 as manufactured by Koppers Company, Inc., Pittsburgh, Pa., or equal.

D. Finish coating shall be compatible with the prime coating used and shall be

applied as specified in Section 09900 - Painting.

15126-9

3.02 INSTALLATION A. All pipes, horizontal and vertical, shall be rigidly supported from the building

structure by approved supports. Supports shall be provided at changes in direction and elsewhere as shown in the Drawings or specified herein. No piping shall be supported from other piping or from metal stairs, ladders, and walkways, unless it is so indicated on the Drawings, or specifically directed or authorized by the Engineer.

B. All pipe supports shall be designed with liberal strength and stiffness to support

the respective pipes under the maximum combination of peak loading conditions to include pipe weight, liquid weight, liquid movement, and pressure forces, thermal expansion and contraction, vibrations, and all probable externally applied forces. Prior to installation, all pipe supports shall be approved by the Engineer.

C. Pipe supports shall be provided to minimize lateral forces through valves, both

sides of split type couplings, and sleeve type couplings and to minimize all pipe forces on pump housings. Pump housings shall not be utilized to support connecting pipes.

D. Pipe supports shall be provided as follows: 1. Cast iron and ductile iron shall be supported at a maximum support

spacing of 10 feet, 0-inches with minimum of one support per pipe section at the joints.

2. All vertical pipes shall be supported at each floor or at intervals of at least

15 feet by approved pipe collars, clamps brackets or wall rests, and at all points necessary to insure rigid construction.

E. Effects of thermal expansion and contraction of the pipe shall be accounted for in

pipe support selection and installation. F. Inserts for pipe hangers and supports shall be installed on forms before concrete is

poured. Before setting these items, all Drawings and figures shall be checked which have a direct bearing on the pipe location. Responsibility for the proper location of pipe supports is included under this Section.

G. Continuous metal inserts shall be embedded flush with the concrete surface. H. Standard Pipe Supports: 1. Horizontal Suspended Piping:

15126-10

a. Single Pipes: Adjustable swivel-ring, splint-ring, or clevis hangers.

b. Grouped Pipes: Trapeze hanger systems. c. Furnish galvanized steel protection shield and oversized hangers

for all insulated pipe. d. Furnish precut sections of rigid insulation with vapor barrier at

hangers for all insulated pipe. 2. Horizontal Piping Supported From Walls: a. Single Pipes: Wall brackets or wall clips attached to wall with

anchors. Clips attached to wall mounted framing also acceptable. b. Stacked Piping: 1) Wall mounted framing system and clips acceptable for

piping smaller than 3-inch minimal diameter. 2) Piping clamps which resist axial movement of pipe through

support not acceptable. c. Wall mounted piping clips not acceptable for insulated piping. 3. Horizontal Piping Supported From Floors: a. Stanchion Type: 1) Pedestal type; adjustable with stanchion, saddle, and

anchoring flange. 2) Use yoke saddles for piping whose centerline elevation is

18 inches or greater above the floor and for all exterior installations.

3) Provide neoprene waffle isolation pad under anchoring

flanges, adjacent to equipment or where otherwise required to provide vibration isolation.

b. Floor Mounted Channel Supports: 1) Use for piping smaller than 3-inch nominal diameter

running along floors and in trenches at piping elevations

15126-11

lower than can be accommodated using pedestal pipe supports.

2) Attach channel framing to floors with anchor bolts. 3) Attach pipe to channel with clips or pipe clamps. c. Concrete Cradles: Use for piping larger than 3-inch along floor

and in trenches at piping elevations lower than can be accommodated using stanchion type.

4. Vertical Pipe: Support with wall brackets and base elbow or riser clamps

on floor penetrations. 5. Standard Attachments: a. To Concrete Ceilings: Concrete inserts. b. To Steel Beams: I-beam clamp or welded attachments. c. To Wooden Beams: Lag screws and angle clips to members not

less than 2-1/2 inches thick. d. To Concrete Walls: Concrete inserts or brackets or clip angles

with anchor bolts. 6. Existing Walls and Ceilings: Install as specified for new construction,

unless shown otherwise. 3.03 INSPECTION AND TESTING (Not Applicable) 3.04 START-UP AND INSTRUCTION (Not Applicable)

END OF SECTION

15129-1

SECTION 15129

COUPLINGS AND CONNECTORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: Furnish and install couplings and connectors of the type(s) and

size(s) in the location(s) shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. Pipe supports shall be placed where shown on the Drawings. The Contractor may install additional pipe supports and flexible couplings to facilitate piping installation, provided that complete details describing their location, the pipe supports and hydraulic thrust protection are submitted. Thrust protection shall be adequate to sustain the force developed by 150% of the design operating pressures specified.

B. Related Work Described Elsewhere: 1. Pressure Testing of Piping: Section 15044. C. General Design (Not Applicable) 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Minimum pressure rating equal to that of the pipeline in which they are to be

installed. B. Couplings and connectors, other than those specified herein, are subject to the

Engineer's approval. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Materials and Shop Drawings: 1. Submit shop drawings in accordance with the Section 01340 and the

following. 2. Submit manufacturer's catalog data on couplings and connectors. Show

manufacturer's model or figure number for each type of coupling or joint for each type of pipe material for which couplings are used.

15129-2

3. Submit manufacturer's recommended torques to which the coupling bolts shall be tightened for the flexible gasketed sleeve-type compression pipe couplings.

4. Show materials of construction by ASTM reference and grade. Show

dimensions. 5. Show number, size and material of construction of the rods and lugs for

each thrust harness on the project. B. Additional Information (Not Applicable) C. Operating Instructions (Not Applicable) 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Equipment shall be handled, shipped and stored in accordance with Section 01600

- Material and Equipment. 1.05 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEES A. Provide equipment warranty in accordance with Section 01740 - Warranties and

Bonds. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All couplings and connectors shall be restrained type utilizing wedge style

restraints. 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. All Couplings and Connectors: 1. Gasket Materials: Composition suitable for exposure to the liquids to be

contained within the pipes. 2. Diameters to properly fit the specified types of pipes on which couplings

and connectors are to be installed. B. Sleeve-Type Couplings (when applicable): 1. Exposed couplings (when applicable):

15129-3

a. Steel middle ring b. Two steel or ductile iron follower rings c. Two wedge-section gaskets d. Sufficient steel bolts to properly compress the gaskets e. Acceptable manufacturers (1) Smith - Blair, Inc. - 470 Series Pipe-Lok (2) Or approved equal 2. Buried Couplings (when applicable): a. Steel middle ring b. Two steel or ductile iron follower rings c. Two wedge-section gaskets d. Bolts and nuts for buried couplings, shall be Type 316 stainless

steel conforming to ASTM A 193, Grade B8 for bolts, and ASTM A 194, Grade 8 for nuts.

e. Acceptable manufacturers: (1) Smith - Blair, Inc. - 470 Series Pipe-Lok (2) Or approved equal C. Split Type (Grooved End) Couplings (when applicable): 1. Constructed from malleable or ductile iron. 2. For use with grooved or shouldered end pipe with minimum wall thickness

as required so as not to weaken pipe. 3. Cast in two segments for 3/4-inch through 14-inch pipe sizes, four

segments for 15-inch through 24-inch pipe sizes, and six segments for pipe sizes over 24-inch.

4. Coating: Enamel

15129-4

5. Bolts: Carbon steel 6. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Victaulic Company of America, Style 77 b. Gustin-Bacon Co. c. Or equal D. Flanged Adapters (when applicable): 1. For joining plain end or grooved end pipe to flanged pipes and fittings. 2. Adapters shall conform in size and bolt hole placement to ANSI standards

for steel and/or cast iron flanges 125 or 150 pound standard unless otherwise required for connections.

3. Exposed Sleeve Type (Ferrous Piping): a. Constructed from steel b. Coating: Epoxy c. Bolts: Carbon steel d. Acceptable manufacturers: (1) Smith-Blair Inc. – 911 or 920 Series Flange-Lok (2) Or approved equal 4. Split Type (Ferrous Piping): a. Constructed from malleable or ductile iron b. For use with grooved or shouldered end pipe c. Coating: Enamel d. Acceptable manufacturers: (1) Victaulic Company of America - Style 741 for pipe

diameters of 2 inches through 12 inches

15129-5

(2) Victaulic Company of America - Style 742 for pipe

diameters of 14 inches through 16 inches. (3) Or equal E. Flexible Expansion Joints: 1. Flexible expansion joints shall be of the molded arch design manufactured

of neoprene rubber with polyester and steel reinforced Neoprene body and shall be supplied with a Hypalon coating. Joints shall be flanged, suitable for 150 psi water working pressure and in accordance with ANSI B16.1 drilling and bolting patterns. Flanged ends shall be furnished with galvanized split ductile iron retaining rings.

2. Material to be manufactured from a composition material suitable for

exposure to the liquid, pressure and temperature to be contained within the pipe.

3. Provide limit restraint bolts on all lines. Restraint bolts and nuts shall be

Type 316 stainless steel. 4. Minimum performance for flexible expansion joints shall be as follows:

Size

(Inches)

Axial

Compression

Lateral Elongation

(Inches)

Angular Deflection (Inches)

Deflection (Degrees)

2 1/2 3/8 1/2 15 4 5/8 3/8 1/2 15 6 5/8 3/8 1/2 15 8 5/8 3/8 1/2 15 10 3/4 1/2 3/4 15 12 3/4 1/2 3/4 15

F. Transition Couplings: Transition couplings for connecting different pipes having

different outside diameters shall be steel: Dresser Style 62 or 162, Rockwell Series 413, Baker Series 212 or 240, or equal.

G. Dismantling Joints 1. Combines flanged coupling adaptor and flanged spigot into one assembly. 2. Longitudinal adjustment is provided by the telescoping action of the spigot

inside the flanged coupling adapter. The joint shall accommodate up to 2 inches of longitudinal movement.

15129-6

3. Materials: Flanged Adaptor Body and Spigot: Steel– ASTMA53 or A283. Grade C,

minimum yield strength of 30,000 psi. Follower Flange: Steel- ASTMA536, Ductile Iron per ASTMA536, or

carbon steel, minimum yield of 30,000 psi. Gasket: Buna-N 4. Manufacturing Smith Blair, Model 975, or approved equal.

TIE BOLTS OR STUD REQUIREMENTS FOR FLEXIBLE PIPE COUPLINGS

Tie Bolt or Stud Minimum Requirements

150 psi 300 psi

Nominal Pipe Size (Inches)

No. Bolts or Studs

Size (Inches)

No. Bolts or Studs

Size (Inches)

2 2 5/8 2 5/8 3 2 5/8 2 5/8 4 2 5/8 2 4/8 6 2 5/8 2 5/8 8 2 5/8 2 5/8 10 2 5/8 2 5/8 12 2 3/4 2 7/8 14 2 3/4 2 1 16 2 7/8 2 1-1/4 18 2 1 2 1-3/8 20 2 1 2 1-1/2 24 4 1 4 1-1/4 30 4 1-1/8 4 1-1/2 36 4 1-1/4 4 1-3/4 42 4 1-1/2 6 1-5/8 48 6 1-3/8 6 1-7/8 54 6 1-1/2 6 2-1/4 60 6 1-5/8 8 2 66 6 1-3/4 8 2-1/4 72 6 1-7/8 10 2-1/4 84 6 2-1/4 12 2-1/4 96 8 2-1/4 14 2-1/4

2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Joint Harnesses:

15129-7

1. Tie bolts or studs shall be as shown in the following table. Bolt or stud material shall conform to ASTM B 193, Grade B7. Nuts shall conform to ASTM A 194, Grade 2H. Lug material shall conform to ASTM A 36, ASTM A 283, Grade B, C, or D, or ASTM A 285, Grade C. Lug dimensions shall be as shown in AWWA Manual M11, Table 19.7.

2. Select number and size of bolts based on the test pressure shown in

Section 15044. For test pressures less than or equal to 150 psi, use the 150-psi design in the table above. For test pressures between 150 and 300 psi, use the 300-psi design in the table above.

3. Provide washer for each lug. Washer material shall be the same as the

nuts. Minimum washer thickness shall be 1/8-inch. B. Bolts and Nuts for Flanges: 1. Bolts and nuts for flanges located indoors and in enclosed vaults and

structures shall be carbon steel, ASTM A 307, Grade B. 2. Bolts and nuts for buried and submerged flanges, flanges in open vaults

and structures, and flanges located outdoors above ground shall be Type 316 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A 193, Grade B8M for bolts, and ASTM A 194, Grade 8M for nuts.

3. Bolts used in flange insulation kits shall conform to ASTM B 193, Grade

B7. Nuts shall comply with ASTM A 194, Grade 2H. 4. Provide washers for each unit. Washers shall be of the same material as

the nuts. 2.04 SPARE PARTS (Not Applicable) 2.05 QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor shall follow Manufacturer's and Supplier's recommended product

quality control specifics as required for this project. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION (Not Applicable) 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Sleeve Type Couplings (when applicable):

15129-8

1. Thoroughly clean pipe ends for a distance of 8 inches from the ends prior

to installing couplings, and use soapy water as a gasket lubricant. 2. Slip a follower ring and gasket (in that order) over each pipe and place the

middle ring centered over the joint. 3. Insert the other length into the middle ring the proper distance. 4. Press the gaskets and followers evenly and firmly into the middle ring

flares. 5. Insert the bolts, finger tighten and progressively tighten diametrically

opposite nuts uniformly around the adapter with a torque wrench applying the torque recommended by the manufacturer.

6. Insert and tighten the tapered threaded lock pins. 7. Insert the nuts and bolts for the flange, finger tighten and progressively

tighten diametrically opposite bolts uniformly around the flange to the torque recommended by the manufacturer.

B. Split Type Flange Adapters (when applicable): Install in the same manner as Split

Type Couplings. C. Buried Couplings, Adapters and Connectors (when applicable): Thoroughly coat

all exterior surfaces, including nuts and bolts, after assembly and inspection by the Engineer with a heavy-bodied bituminous mastic as approved by the Engineer.

D. Install thrust rods, supports, and other provisions to properly support pipe weight

and axial equipment loads. E. All couplings and connectors shall be properly restrained. 3.03 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Hydrostatically test flexible pipe couplings, and joints, in place with the pipe

being tested. Test in accordance with Section 15044. 3.04 START-UP AND INSTRUCTION (Not Applicable)

END OF SECTION

15130-1

SECTION 15130

PRESSURE GAUGES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: This section includes materials and installation of pressure gauges

and accessories. B. General Design: Minimum pressure rating shall be equal to that of the pipeline in

which they are to be installed. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: The manufacturer shall have a minimum of five (5) years experience

in the manufacture of pressure gauges. B. Manufacturers: Gauges shall be as manufactured by Ashcroft, Trerice, Winters

Gauges, or equal. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: Submit shop drawings in accordance with the General Conditions and

Section 01340: Shop Drawings, Working Drawings, and Samples. A. Manufacturer's catalog data and descriptive literature. B. Materials of construction by ASTM reference and grade. C. Manufacturer's certificate of compliance with the referenced ANSI standards. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Gauge Design: Gauges shall comply with ANSI B40.1, Grade 2A. Gauges shall

incorporate the following features:

1. Solid or open front with side or rear blowout relief. 2. Pressure tight. 3. 270 degree arc with adjustable pointer.

15130-2

4. Stem mounted. 5. Oil filled unless specified otherwise. 6. Size of gauge shall be 4-1/2 inches for all process liquid and 6 inches for

process air unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 7. Stem or connection size shall be 3/8 inch minimum. 8. Provide a gauge having a pressure range determined by the greater of the

following two criteria: a. Two times the normal operating pressure; and b. One and one-third times the test pressure.

9. Gauges of size smaller than 4-1/2 inches shall conform to ANSI B40.1, Grade

A. Otherwise, construction shall be as described above. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Materials of construction shall be as shown in the following table:

Item Material Specification 1. Case Stainless steel AISI 316 2. Bourdon tube Stainless steel AISI 316 3. Windows Glass -- 4. Ring Stainless steel AISI 316 5. Stem Stainless steel AISI 316 6. Dial face Aluminum with clear 6061-T6,

baked-on acrylic coating ASTM B 209 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Pipe Nipples and Fittings: Nipples for connection gauges to piping shall be Schedule

80S, Grade TP 316 seamless stainless steel, conforming to ASTM A 312. Fittings shall conform to ASTM A 403, Class WP316. Threads shall conform to ANSI B2.1. Size of pipe nipple shall match the gauge connection size.

B. Spare Parts: Provide one (1) spare gauge for each type supplied.

15130-3

D. Gauge Protectors (for use in process piping containing liquids having solids concentration greater than 1.0 percent):

1. Gauge protector shall consist of three parts: a flexible, impermeable,

elastomer cylinder; a captive sensing liquid; and a stainless steel housing. 2. As process liquid flows through the housing, the cylinder shall transmit

pressure through the sensing liquid. An attached 4-1/2 inch pressure gauge, as specified previously, shall indicate the pressure. Gauge outlet in the spool or ring shall be threaded, 1/4 inch, per ANSI B2.1.

3. Spools of sizes 1 inch through 4 inches shall be of the isolation-spool type

with flanged ends. Spools of sizes 6 through 10 inches shall be of the isolation-ring type, fitting between two adjacent flanges.

4. Determine the flange rating based on the test pressure. For test pressure 200

psi and less, use Class 150 flanges, ANSI B16.5. For test pressures greater than 200 psi, use Class 300 flanges, ANSI B16.4.

5. Materials of construction shall be as follows:

Item Material Specification

Housing Stainless steel AISI 316

Flexible cylinder Buna N. or --- Neoprene

Sensing liquid Silicone oil ---

6. Protectors shall be manufactured by Ronningen-Petter, Red Valve, or equal.

D. Diaphragm Seals (for use in all processing piping containing liquids, potable and

nonpotable water):

1. Provide diaphragm seals with gauge mountings where shown on the drawings. Material of construction shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Pressure rating shall be at least that of the pressure gauge to which it is attached. Liquid filling shall be silicone.

2. Gauge and diaphragm seal shall be assembled together at the factory, with the

liquid fill included. Provide a Type 316 stainless steel plug or cock in the flush connection.

15130-4

3. Provide one pint of replacement fill liquid for every ten gauges having diaphragm seals or one pint for the entire project, whichever quantity is greater.

E. Pressure Snubbers: Provide pressure snubbers with gauge mountings for all gauges

not requiring diaphragm seals. Material of construction shall be Type 303 or 316 stainless steel. Inlet and outlet connections shall be 1/2-inch NPT.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install gauges before conducting pressure tests. Ream, clean and remove burrs from

threaded piping before making up joints. Apply thread lubricant to threaded ends before assembling.

3.02 INSPECTION AND TESTING: A. Compare pressure readings of permanent gauges with Master test gauge. If reading

of installed gauges varies by more than ± 5 percent from the Master gauge the installed gauge shall be replaced.

B. Provide factory certification of testing and calibration for each Annular Seal or

Diaphragm Seal Assembly. Unit shall be tested and calibrated in accordance with practice procedures on test equipment traceable to the National Institute of Standard (NIST).

END OF SECTION

15140-1

SECTION 15140

HVAC AND PLUMBING SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Pipe, duct, and equipment hangers, supports, and associated anchors.

B. Equipment bases and supports.

C. Sleeves and seals.

D. Flashing and sealing equipment and pipe stacks.

1.02 WORK FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS

A. Furnish hanger and support inserts sleeves to Section for placement into formwork.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and product data for all items listed under this section.

B. Indicate hanger and support framing and attachment methods.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPE AND DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 inches: Stainless steel, adjustable, clevis.

B. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Stainless steel channels with welded spacers andhanger rods; Stainless steelroll and stand for hot pipe sizes 6 inches and over.

C. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Stainless steelhook.

D. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded stainless steel bracket andclamp; adjustable stainless steel yoke and roll for hot pipe sizes 6 inches and over.

E. Vertical Support: Stainless steel riser clamp.

15140-2

F. Floor Support for Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches and All Cold PipeSizes: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, locknut nipple, floor flange, and concretepier or steel support.

G. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.

H. Shield for Insulated Piping 2 Inches and Smaller: 18 gage galvanized steel shieldover insulation in 180 degree segments, minimum 12 inches long per pipe support.

I. Shield for Insulated Piping 2-1/2 Inches and Larger (Except Cold Water Piping):Pipe covering protective saddles.

J. Shields for Insulated Cold Water Piping 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: Hard blocknon-conducting saddles in 90 degree segments, 12 inch minimum length, blockthickness same as insulation thickness.

K. Shields for Vertical Copper Pipe Risers: Sheet lead.

L. Ductwork shall be supported per the requirements of 2005 SMACNA HVAC DuctConstruction Standards – Metal and Flexible, 3rd Edition. Exposed ductwork shall besupported using stainless steel trapeze hangers.

2.02 HANGER RODS

A. Stainless steel Hanger Rods: Threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuousthreaded.

2.03 FLASHING

A. Metal Flashing: galvanized steel.

B. Lead Flashing: 5 lb/sq ft sheet lead for waterproofing; one lb/sq ft sheet lead forsoundproofing.

C. Flexible Flashing: 47 mil thick sheet butyl; compatible with roofing.

D. Caps: Steel, 22 gage minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements.

2.04 SLEEVES

A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: Form with 18 gage galvanizedsteel; plastic inserts or Schedule 40 steel.

B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Walls, Footings, and Potentially WetFloors: Form with steel pipe or 18 gage galvanized steel.

15140-3

C. Sleeves through beams shall be Schedule 40 steel; only in locations approved by theStructural Engineer.

D. Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel.

E. Flanges shall be 20 gage galvanized steel.

2.05 FABRICATION

A. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction.Provide for continuous insulation wrapping.

B. Design hangers without disengagement of supported pipe.

2.06 FINISH

A. Prime coat steel hangers and supports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Support horizontal piping as follows:

PIPE SIZE MAX. HANGER SPACING HANGER DIAMETER

1/2 to 1-1/4 inch 6'-6" 3/8"1-1/2 to 2 inch 10'-0" 3/8"2-1/2 to 3 inch 10'-0" 1/2"4 to 6 inch 10'-0" 5/8"PVC (All Sizes) 6'-0" 3/8"C.I. Bell and Spigot 5'-0" 5/8"(or No-Hub) and at joints

B. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering andadjacent work.

C. Place a hanger within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.

D. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment.

E. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacingbetween hangers.

15140-4

F. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor athub.

G. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, providestainless steel trapeze hangers.

H. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.

I. All hangers, hanger rods, supports, etc. shall be double nutted.

3.02 EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS

A. Provide equipment bases of concrete type.

B. Provide templates, anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoringequipment.

C. Construct support of steel members. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure.

D. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed.

3.03 FLASHING

A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counterflashing where piping and ductworkpenetrate weather or waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs.

B. Flash vent and soil pipes projecting 3 inches minimum above finished roof surfacewith lead worked one inch minimum into hub, 8 inches minimum clear on sides with24 x 24 inches sheet size. For pipes through outside walls, turn flanges back intowall and calk, metal counterflash and seal.

C. Flash floor drains in floors with topping over finished areas with lead, 10 inches clearon sides with minimum 36 x 36 inch sheet size. Fasten flashing to drain clampdevice.

D. Seal floor, and mop sink drains watertight to adjacent materials.

E. Provide acoustical lead flashing around ducts and pipes penetrating equipmentrooms, installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for sound control.

3.04 SLEEVES

A. Extend sleeves through floors one inch above finished floor level. Calk sleeves fulldepth and provide floor plate.

15140-5

B. Install stainless steel escutcheons at finished surfaces.

END OF SECTION

15150-1

SECTION 15150

HVAC VIBRATION ISOLATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Supply necessary equipment such as inertia bases, vibration isolators, etc. as requiredto prevent excessive noise and vibration to be transmitted to the building from allmotor driven equipment.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and product data for all materials listed under this section.

B. Indicate inertia bases on shop drawings.

C. Indicate vibration isolator locations, with static and dynamic load on each, on shopdrawings and described on product data.

D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT AND METHODS

A. Equipment vendors shall furnish the required isolation equipment and installationinstructions with each piece of equipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A. Install vibration isolators for motor driven equipment.

B. Color code spring mounts.

15150-2

C. Provide spring isolators on piping connected to isolated equipment as follows: Up to4 inch diameter, first three points of support. Static deflection of first point shall betwice deflection of isolated equipment.

3.02 EQUIPMENT BASES

A. Set steel bases for one inch clearance between housekeeping pad and base. Setconcrete inertia bases for 2 inch clearance. Adjust equipment level.

B. Bases must be approved by the county prior to installation.

3.03 ACCEPTANCE

A. The Contractor shall be responsible to take the necessary steps to insure that noequipment operates with excessive noise or vibration transmission.

END OF SECTION

15160-1

SECTION 15160

HVAC AND PLUMBING THROUGH PENETRATION FIRE STOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Provide fire stopping for the following through penetrations:

1. Hydronic piping

2. Refrigerant piping

3. Conduit for wiring and controls

4. Sprinkler piping

5. Domestic hot, cold and recirculating water, rain leaders, sanitary waste andvent

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)


A. This work shall be performed by a contractor trained in the installation orapplication of systems similar in complexity to those required for this project.The contractor shall have at least 2 years experience with through penetration firestopping systems and shall have completed a least 5 comparable scale projectsusing these systems.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data including the following:

1. Manufacturers specifications and technical data

2. Detailed specification of construction and fabrication installationinstructions

15160-2

B. Shop drawings

1. For each standard application of penetration item and surface beingpenetrated provide a manufacturers UL approved system cut sheetidentifying the UL system number, UL classified devices or materials to beused, other materials to be used, anchorages, annular space requirementsand sizes, dimensions and locations of all items.

2. For each non-standard application, provide a manufacturers qualifiedengineering judgement and drawing. The drawing shall indicate thoseitems specified in A above.

3. All UL approved systems shall be selected based on their "T" rating. Allsystems shall provide the same ratings as the rating of the floor or wallbeing penetrated. as shown on the plans.

C. Qualifications

1. Provide list of past projects indicating past experience.

2. Provide statement from manufacturer that installer has to be trained in theproper method of installing fire stop systems.

D. Guarantee

1. Submit copies of written guarantee agreeing to repair or replace jointsealers which fail in joint adhesion, co-adhesion, abrasion resistance,weather resistance, extrusion resistance, migration resistance, stainresistance, or general durability or appear to deteriorate in any othermanner not clearly specified by submitted manufacturer's data as aninherent quality of the material for the exposure indicated. The guaranteeperiod shall be one year from date of substantial completion.

1.05 MATERIAL HANDLING

A. Coordinate delivery with scheduled installation date, allow minimum storage atsite. Store materials in a clean, dry, ventilated location. Protect from soiling,abuse, moisture and freezing.

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Contractor shall visit the job site prior to bid, to verify wall and floor types to bepenetrated. Fire ratings of walls are indicated on the plans, ratings of the floorsare assumed to be two (2) hours.

15160-3

B. Contractor shall coordinate with the other trades for any penetrating items (pipe,conduit, etc.) that have to be routed differently than shown on the plans.Contractor shall provide fire stopping for all derouted items whether different ULapproved systems or additional materials are required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Acceptable manufacturers and products shall be those listed in the UL fireresistance directory for the UL system involved.

B. All systems and devices shall be asbestos free.

C. Systems or devices listed in the UL. Fire resistance directory under categoriesXHCR and XHEZ may be used, providing that it conforms to the constructiontype, penetrant type, annular space requirements and fire rating involved in eachseparate instance and that the system be symmetrical for wall applications.

D. Fill, void or cavity materials shall be as classified under category XHHW in theUL fire resistance directory.

E. Forming materials shall be as classified under category XHKU in the UL fireresistance directory.

F. All firestopping products shall be from a single manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed and identifyconditions detrimental to proper or timely completion.

B. Verify barrier penetrations are properly sized and in suitable condition forapplication of materials.

C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

D. Clean surfaces to be in contact with penetration seal materials, of dirt, grease, oil,loose materials, rust, or other substances that may affect proper fitting, adhesion,or the required fire resistance.

15160-4

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install penetration seal materials in accordance with printed instructions of theU.L. Fire Resistance Directory and in accordance with manufacturer's instruction.

B. Protect materials from damage on surfaces subject to traffic.

C. Place firestopping in annular space around fire dampers before installation ofdamper's anchoring flanges which are installed in accordance with fire dampermanufacturers recommendations.

D. Where large openings are created in walls or floors to permit installation of pipes,ducts, cable tray, bus duct or other items, close unused portions of opening withfirestopping material tested for the application. See U.L. Fire ResistanceDirectory and Section 3.06 of this document.

E. Where rated walls are constructed with horizontally continuous air space, doublewidth masonry, or double stud frame construction, provide vertical, 12 inch widefiber dams for full thickness and height of air cavity at maximum 15 footintervals.

3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Clean up spills of liquid components.

B. Neatly cut and trim materials as required.

C. Remove equipment, materials and debris, leaving area in undamaged, cleancondition.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Examine penetration sealed areas to ensure proper installation before concealingor enclosing areas.

B. Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by applicable code authorities.

C. Perform under this section patching and repairing of firestopping caused bycutting or penetration by other trades.

END OF SECTION

15192-1

SECTION 15192

PETROLEUM PIPING AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Identification of petroleum piping.

B. Identification of petroleum storage tanks.

1.02 SUBMITTAL

A. Submit samples and manufacturer's installation instructions for all petroleumidentification products used.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Pipe Markers Snap/Strap-Around Markers: For use of identifying petroleum pipingindoors and outdoors. Markers shall be outdoor grade acrylic plastic with UVinhibitors and shall be corrosion and abrasion resistant. Color coded background,color of legend and letter size, and length of letter size and length of color field shallconform completely to the latest edition of ANSI A13.1. Markers shall indicatedirection of flow. Legends shall be alternately reversed and repeated for viewingfrom any angle. Markers shall be factory formed for the installed diameter. Markersless than 6 inch diameter shall snap-on. Markers 6 inch diameter and larger shall besecured with stainless steel spring fasteners provided by the marker manufacturer.Style and markings shall be as indicated in section 3.02 B.

B. Engraved Signs: For use of identifying storage tanks and hose reels. Material forindoor tanks shall be equal to Seton material SETONPLY. Material for outdoor tanksshall be equal to Seton material SETONFLEX. Style and markings shall be asindicated in section 3.03 B & C.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for engraved signs. Adhesive shallbe Seton Tuffbond Adhesive #15660 or equal. Engrave signs shall be installed onall tanks and hose reels.

15192-2

3.02 PIPING

A. Piping shall be identified at maximum 20 feet intervals, at each side of wallpenetration, within 4 feet of hose reels, within 36 inches of end of hose from reels,and at each valve. Piping identification shall include type of service and direction offlow.

B. Piping shall be marked by the following schedule.

1. DIESEL FUEL - White letters on Green background, Seton Style No.M4068.

3.03 STORAGE TANKS

A. Storage tank shall be identified with engraved signs at three locations as follows: 1)at centerline of tank where the greatest visibility to personnel occurs; 2) at each filllocation; and 3) at one end of tank with greatest visibility to personnel. Storage tankidentification shall include type of service and capacity. Tank shall have "NOSMOKING" signs posted. Letters shall be 3" high for locations 1 and 3 listedabove, for location 2 the letters shall be sized to fit space available.

B. Storage tank shall be marked by the following schedule.

1. DIESEL FUEL - White letters on Green background, Seton Style No.M5300.

END OF SECTION

15195-1

SECTION 15195

MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Identification of mechanical piping, ductwork and equipment. B. Painting of exposed mechanical piping. C. Painting of accessible, concealed mechanical piping. D. Identification of domestic cold, hot, non-potable water, sprinkler, sanitary drain,

and sanitary vent piping systems. 1.02 SUBMITTAL

A. Submit samples and manufacturer's installation instructions for all mechanical and plumbing identification products used.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Plastic Nameplates: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved white letters on black background color

B. Metal Tags: Brass with 1/2 inch high black filled numbers and/or letters,

minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter, brass link chain and hooks C. Roll form pipe markers of pressure sensitive vinyl material. Equal to Seton Roll

Form Pipe Markers, see 3.02 B schedule for style number of pipe markers. Provide directional arrows for each service.

D. Engraved Metal Tack Markers: For use of identifying valve locations above

acoustical tile ceilings 7/8" diameter head, 7/16" insert point, 6 colors available - yellow, light green, light blue, orange, black and white. Color to be selected by submittal. Markers shall be numbered consecutively with standard 3/16" characters. Seton Style ECM or equal.

E. Paint: Numbers for paint colors are referenced to Sherwin-Williams brand. Equivalent products by Glidden or Pratt and Lambert are acceptable.

15195-2

F. Stencil Paint: Semi-gloss enamel. G. Pipe Markers Snap/Strap-Around Markers: Outdoor grade acrylic plastic with

UV inhibitors. Color coded background, color of legend letter size and length of letter size and length of color field shall conform completely with the latest edition of ANSI A13.1. markers shall indicate direction of flow. Legends shall be alternately reversed and repeated for viewing from any angle. Markers shall be factory formed for the installed diameter. Markers less than 6 inch diameter shall snap-on. Markers 6 inch diameter and larger shall be secured with stainless steel spring fasteners provided by the marker manufacturer. Markers shall be Set Mark pipe markers by Seton or approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with Section 09900 for painting. C. Plastic nameplates shall be installed with corrosion resistant mechanical fasteners. D. Metal tags shall be installed with corrosion resistant chain. E. Engraved metal markers should be identified on as-built drawings. F. Stenciling shall produce neat, high contrast markings. Sizes of markings shall be per the following schedule:

Outside Diameter of Length of Size of Insulation or Pipe Color Field Markings

3/4" - 1-1/4" 8" 1/2" 1-1/2" - 2" 8" 3/4" 2-1/2" - 6" 12" 1-1/4" 8" - 10" 24" 2-1/2" Over 10" 32" 3-1/2" Ductwork and Equipment -- 2-1/2"

G. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for roll form pipe identification

markers. These markers shall be installed on piping above ceilings.

15195-3

3.02 PIPING A. Piping shall be identified at maximum 20 feet intervals, at each side of wall

penetration, and at each valve. Piping identification shall include type of service and direction of flow.

B. Piping above ceiling shall be marked by the following schedule

1. Domestic Cold Water - White letters on Green, Seton Style No. M4303. 2. Domestic Hot Water - Black letters on Yellow, Seton Style No. M4304. 3. Nonpotable Water - Black letters on Yellow, Seton Style No. M4361. 4. Sprinkler Water - White letters on Red, Seton Style No. M4315. 5. Sanitary Drain - White letters on Green, Seton Style No. M4369. 6. Sanitary Vent - White letters on Green, Seton Style No. M4377.

C. Piping exposed shall be marked with Set Mark pipe markers per man Exposed mechanical piping shall be painted with gloss enamel paint and identified per the following schedule:

1. Refrigerant Piping: Black letters on a safety-purple background 2. Condensate Piping: White letters on a safety-gray background

3.03 VALVES

A. Valves in main and branch piping shall be identified with metal tags. B. Provide valve chart and schedule in aluminum frame with clear plastic shield.

Install at location as directed. 3.04 DUCTWORK

A. Ductwork shall be identified with stenciled painting. Identify as to air handling unit number, and area served. Locate identification at air handling unit, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.

3.05 EQUIPMENT

A. Large equipment such as chillers, boilers, cooling towers, air handling units, base mounted pumps, fans, etc., shall be identified with stenciled painting.

B. Small equipment such as in-line pumps shall be identified with metal tags. C. Starters for mechanical equipment shall be labeled with the corresponding equipment

designation using plastic nameplates.

15195-4

D. Control panels, gauges, instruments and major control components not located at

control panels shall be identified with plastic nameplates.

END OF SECTION

15200-1

SECTION 15200

HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

The other Contract Documents complement the requirements of this Section. The General Requirements apply to the work of this Section.

1.02 SCOPE OF WORK

The Work shall include the furnishings of systems, equipment, and materials specified in this Division and as required by Contract Documents to include: supervision, operation, methods, and labor for the fabrication, installation, start-up, and tests for the complete mechanical installation. Drawings for the Work are diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of the Work and to indicate the general arrangement and locations of the Work. Because of the scale of the Drawings, certain basic items such as pipe fittings, access panels, and sleeves may not be shown. This Contractor shall be responsible for selecting the equipment to fit the space provided. The location and sizes for ductwork, pipe fittings, sleeves, inserts, and other basic items required by code and other sections shall be coordinated and included for the proper installation of the work. Equipment Specification may not deal individually with minute items required such as components, parts, controls, and devices which may be required to produce the equipment performance specified or as required to meet the equipment warranties. Where such items are required, they shall be included by the supplier of the equipment, whether or not specifically called for in the Contract Documents. Where the words "provide", "furnish", "include", or "install" are used in the Specification or on the Drawings, it shall mean to furnish, install, and test complete and ready for operation, the items mentioned. If an item is indicated in the Contract Documents, it shall be considered sufficient for including same in the work. Where noted on the Drawings or where called for in other Sections of the Project Manual, the Contractor for this Division shall install equipment furnished by Others, and shall make required service connections. Contractor shall verify with the supplier of the equipment the requirements for the installation. Coordinate with all trades in submittal of shop drawings. Shop drawings shall be prepared clearly indicating all applicable components. Space conditions shall be detailed to the

15200-2

satisfaction of all concerned trades, subject to review and final acceptance by the Engineer. In the event that the Contractor installs his work before coordinating with other trades or so as to cause any interference with work of other trades, the necessary changes shall be made in the work to correct the condition, at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS

Conform to latest edition of governing codes, ordinances, or regulations of city, county, state, or utility company having jurisdiction. Where local codes are not applicable, conform to Standard Plumbing Code; Standard Mechanical Code; Rules of Department of Air and Water Pollution Control; and National Electrical Code. Work not regulated by Governmental Bodies shall be performed in accordance with current issues of the following Codes and Standards. Air Moving and Conditioning Association - AMCA American National Standards Institute - ANSI American Society of Mechanical Engineers - ASME American Society for Testing and Materials - ASTM American Water Works Association - AWWA Factory Mutual - FM Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry - MSS National Electrical Manufacturers Association - NEMA National Fire Protection Association, National Electrical Code - NEC National Fire Protection Association - NFPA Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, as amended - OSHA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association - SMACNA Underwriters' Laboratories - UL Local and State Plumbing Code Utility Company Regulations as pertains to services provided Other Codes and Standards as individually referred to in the Technical Sections of the Specification.

1.04 FEES, PERMITS, AND INSPECTIONS

Secure all permits and pay all fees required in connection with the Work. Coordinate and provide such inspections as are required by the Authorities with jurisdiction over the site. Where applications are required for procuring of services to the building, prepare and file such application with the Utility Company. Furnish all information required in connection with the application in the form required by the Utility Company.

15200-3

1.05 ACTIVE SERVICES

Existing active services; water, gas, sewer, electric, when encountered, shall be protected against damage. Do not prevent or disturb operation of active services which are to remain. If active services are encountered which require relocation, make request to authorities with jurisdiction for determination of procedures. Where existing services are to be abandoned, they shall be terminated in conformance with requirements of the Utility or Municipality having jurisdiction.

1.06 SITE INSPECTION

Contractor shall inspect the site to familiarize himself with conditions of the site which will affect his work and shall verify points of connection with utilities, routing of outside piping to include required clearances from any existing structures, trees or other obstacles. Extra payment will not be allowed for changes in the Work required because of Contractor's failure to make this inspection.

1.07 OPENINGS, CUTTING, AND PATCHING

Coordinate the placing of openings in the new structure as required for the installation of the Mechanical Work. When additional patching is required due to failure to inspect work; then provide the patching required to properly close the openings, including patch painting. When cutting and patching of the structure is made necessary due to failure to install piping, ducts, sleeves, or equipment on schedule, or due to failure to furnish, on schedule, the information required for the leaving of openings, then provide the cutting and patching as required, including patch painting.

1.08 WIRING FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

Division 16 shall provide power services for motors and equipment furnished by this Contractor to include safety disconnect switches and final connections. Division 15 shall provide all motors, motor starters, and contactors for equipment furnished under this Division, except where they are an integral part of a motor control center which is provided under another Division. Provide internal wiring, alarm wiring including for fire protection and/or security, control wiring, and interlock wiring for equipment furnished, to include temperature control wiring.

15200-4

Coordinate with Division 16 all motors and other mechanical equipment which require electrical services. Provide schedule which shall include the exact location for rough-in, electrical load, size, and electrical characteristics for all services required. Where motors or equipment furnished require larger services or services of different electrical characteristics than those called for on the Electrical Drawings, provide material as required to fit the substitute equipment. Electrical work provided under Division 15 shall conform to the requirements of Division 16.

1.09 PROTECTION

Special care shall be taken for the protection of equipment furnished. Equipment and material shall be completely protected from weather elements, painting, plaster, etc. until the project is completed. Damage from rust, paint, scratches, etc. shall be repaired as required to restore equipment to original condition. Where the installation or connection of equipment requires work in areas previously finished by other Contractors, the area shall be protected and not marred, soiled, or otherwise damaged during the course of such work. Contractor shall arrange with the other Contractors for repairing and refinishing of such areas which may be damaged. When welding is required inside building, provide one man for a fire watch. Fire watch shall require adequate protection of existing surfaces and observance of lower floors where penetrations exist.

1.10 SUBMITTALS

A. General

1. Submit to Architect/Engineer shop drawings and product data required by the drawings and specifications.

2. Contractor shall compile all data including but not limited to ductwork

materials and construction details, manufacturers catalog and product data, controls wiring diagrams and material data, piping, insulation, water treatment, and test and balance.

3. Submit a minimum of 7 copies of data; more if required by the Architect.

15200-5

B. Submittal Requirements

1. Prepare submittals compiled in a 3 ring, hard bound, loose leaf binder. The

face of the binder shall be clearly marked with the project title and number, the name of the Owner, Architect, Engineer, General Contractor and this contractor.

2. The first page inside the binder shall provide an index, numerically indicating all sections applicable to this submittal.

3. Separate binders shall be provided for HVAC and plumbing trades.

4. Where multiple options are available from a manufacturer, clearly indicate those which are intended to be included with project submittal.

5. Provide plastic, see-through hard tab dividers for each section submitted. In the event an item appears on the drawings not specifically covered by the specifications, provide an additional numeric tab at the end of the index detailing the item and include the submittal data in the binder.

6. Submit only complete project submittals. Partial submittals or submittals not complying with the above requirements shall be returned to the contractor un- marked and rejected.

7. In the interest of project expediency the contractor may pre-submit long lead items for pre-approval. However, the contractor shall not be relieved of including the same data as required by submittal binder and shall be included therein.

8. The Contractor may turn in submittals without control drawings if they require a longer production time. All other items shall be included.

9. Provide a tab for items not included and include an explanation of why item is not included in the submittal and the expected submittal date.

10. Review shop drawings and product data prior to submission to Architect/Engineer.

11. Verify field measurements, field construction criteria, catalog numbers, and similar data.

12. Coordinate each submittal with work of the project and Contract Documents.

15200-6

13. Contractor's responsibility for deviations in submittals from requirements of Contract Documents is not relieved by Architect/Engineer's review of submittals, unless Architect/Engineer gives written acceptance of specific deviations.

14. Notify Architect/Engineer in writing of deviations from requirements of Contract Documents at time submittals are made.

15. A "deviation" shall be construed to mean a minor change to the sequence indicated on drawings or specification.

16. A "deviation" is not intended to allow substitutions or product options.

17. Do not begin work which requires submittals until submittals have been returned with Architect/Engineer's stamp and initials or signature indicating review and approval.

18. Shop Drawings and/or submittals requiring resubmission to the Architect/Engineer due to non-compliance with the Contract Documents and/or incompleteness shall be thoroughly reviewed by the Contractor prior to delivery to the Architect/Engineer for review. The Contractor shall ensure the completeness and compliance of the submittal materials and shall reimburse the Architect/Engineer at their standard hourly billing rates for review of submittals/shop drawings beyond the second submission.

19. Attention is directed to the fact that Architect/Engineer's review is only to check for general conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with Contract Documents. No responsibility is assumed by Architect/ Engineer for correctness of dimensions, details, quantities, procedures shown on shop drawings or submittals.

20. Omission in shop drawings of any materials indicated in Contract Drawings, mentioned in Specifications, or required for proper execution and completion of Work, does not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for providing such materials.

21. Approval of a separate or specified item does not necessarily constitute approval of an assembly in which item functions.

15200-7

1.11 Operating and Maintenance Manuals

A. General

1. Provide three up-to-date copies of shop drawings, product data, and other information described in this Section for use in compiling operating and maintenance manuals.

2. Provide legible submittals made by permanent reproduction copy equipment from typewritten or typeset originals.

3. Pre-punch 8-1/2 inch x 11 inch sheets for standard three ring binders.

4. Submit larger sheets in rolled and protected packages. 1.12 Compilation

A. The Contractor will receive shop drawings, brochures, materials lists, technical data of all types, warranties, guarantees, and other pertinent information and will assemble, catalog, and file information in loose-leaf, hardback three-ring binders.

B. Submittal Format: (Provide each of the following items, as applicable, for each

required item or system. Requirements will vary, depending on the equipment. Refer to specific Specification section requirements.)

Item: (Use appropriate Section title.)

System Description: (Provide a detailed narrative description of each system, describing function, components, capacities, controls and other data specified, and including the following:

Number of. Sizes. Type of operation. Detailed operating instructions, including start-up and shut-down of each system, with indications for position of all controls, as applicable. Wiring Diagrams: (Complete wiring diagrams for internally wired components including controls.) Operating Sequence: (Describe in detail.) Manufacturers Data: (Provide catalog data sheets, specifications, nameplate data and parts list.)

15200-8

Preventative Maintenance: (Provide manufacturer's detailed maintenance recommendations.) Troubleshooting: (Provide manufacturer's sequence for trouble-shooting procedures for operational problems.) Extra Parts: (Provide a listing of extra stock parts furnished as part of the Contract, including 10 sets of filters and lubricants.) Warranties: (Provide specific manufacturer's warranty. List each component and control covered, with day and date warranty begins, date of expiration, and name, address and telephone number of person to contact regarding problems during warranty period.) Directory: (Provide names, addresses and telephone numbers of Contractor, its subcontractors, suppliers, installers and authorized service and parts suppliers. Format as follows:)

Contractor: Address: Telephone No.: Person to Contact:

Subcontractor: Address: Telephone No.: Person to Contact:

Installer: Address: Telephone No.: Person to Contact:

Manufacturer: Address: Telephone No.: Person to Contact:

Local Service Representative: Address: Telephone No.: Person to Contact:

15200-9

1.13 Record Drawings

A. Detailed Requirements for Record Drawings

1. During the progress of the work, the Contractor shall require the job superintendent for the plumbing, air conditioning, heating, ventilating, and fire protection subcontractors to record on their field sets of drawings the exact locations, as installed, of all conduits, pipes, and ducts whether concealed or exposed which were not installed exactly as shown on the contract drawings.

2. Upon completion of the work this data shall be recorded to scale, by a

competent draftsman on sepia line prints or transparent paper of the contract drawings. Sepia will be furnished to the Contractor by the Architect/Engineer, but cost shall be borne by Contractor. Where changes are to be recorded, the sepia line prints shall be erased before the changes are made. Where the work was installed exactly as shown on the contract drawings the sepia line prints shall not be disturbed other than being marked "As-Built". In showing the changes the same legend shall be used to identify piping, etc., as was used on the contract drawings. A separate set of drawings shall be prepared for plumbing, heating, air conditioning, and ventilating work unless two or more divisions are shown on the same sheets of the contract drawings, in which case the various subcontractors shall also show their changes on the same sheets. Each sheet shall bear the date and name of the subcontractor submitting the drawings.

3. The Contractor shall review the completed As-Built drawings and ascertain that all data furnished on the sepia drawings are accurate and truly represent the work as actually installed. Where plumbing, hot or chilled water pipes, inverts etc., are involved as part of the work, the Contractor shall furnish true elevations and locations, all properly referenced by using the original bench mark used for the institution or for this project. The sepia line prints including those unchanged and changed shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer.

4. The Contractor shall submit as-built drawings to the Architect/Engineer for

review.

5. The Engineer shall authorize the Contractor to produce and distribute the as-built drawings as follows:

One (1) blue line to the Engineer. One (1) blue line to the Architect. One (1) sepia to the Owner.

15200-10

1.14 Substitutions and Product Options

A. For products specified only by reference standard, select product meeting that standard, by any manufacturer.

B. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, select any one

of products and manufacturers named which complies with specifications. C. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers and stating "or

equivalent", "or equal", or "or Architect/Engineer approved equivalent", or similar wording, submit a request for proposed substitutions for any product or manufacturer which is not specifically named; for review and approval by the Engineer.

D. For products specified by naming only one product and manufacturer, there may be

an option of an Engineer approval of a product of equal or greater quality or size. 1.15 Submittals

A. Contractor's Base Bid shall be per contract documents. B. Submit separate request for each substitution. Support each request with: C. Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with requirements

stated in contract documents: D. Product identification, including manufacturer's name and address. E. Manufacturer's literature; identify:

Product description. Reference standards. Performance and test data. Name and address of similar projects on which product has been used, and date of each installation.

F. Itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with product specified; list significant variations.

G. Data relating to changes in construction schedule.

H. Any effect of substitution on separate contracts.

I. List of changes required in other work or products.

J. Designation of availability of maintenance services, sources of replacement materials.

15200-11

K. Provide certification of product compatibility with adjacent materials.

L. Substitutions will not be considered for acceptance when:

1. They are indicated or implied on shop drawings or product data submittals

without a formal request from Contractor.

2. Acceptance will require substantial revision of contract documents.

3. In judgement of Engineer, do not include adequate information necessary for a complete evaluation.

4. Substitute products shall not be ordered or installed without written

acceptance of Engineer.

5. Architect/Engineer will determine acceptability of proposed substitutions. 1.16 Prime (General) Contractor’s Representation

A. In making formal request for substitution, Prime (General) Contractor represents that:

1. He has investigated proposed product and has determined that it is equivalent to or superior in all respects to that specified.

2. He will provide same warranties or bonds for substitution as for product specified.

3. He will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into the work, and will make such changes as may be required for the work to be complete in all respects.

4. He waives claims for additional costs caused by substitution which may subsequently become apparent.

B. Cost data is complete and includes related costs under his contract, but not:

1. Costs under separate contracts.

2. Architect/Engineer's costs for redesign or revision of contract documents. 1.17 Architect/Engineer Duties

A. Review Contractor's requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness.

15200-12

B. Notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject requested substitution. 1.18. Finishing

A. General: Prior to acceptance of the installation and final payment of the Contract, the Contractor shall perform the work outlined herein.

B. Cleaning: At the conclusion of the construction, the site and structure shall be

cleaned thoroughly of all debris and unused materials remaining from the mechanical construction. All closed off spaces shall be cleaned of all packing boxes, wood frame members, and other waste materials used in the mechanical construction.

C. The entire system of piping and equipment shall be cleaned internally. The

Contractor shall open all dirt pockets and strainers, completely blowing down as required and clean strainer screens of all accumulated debris.

D. All tanks, fixtures, and pumps shall be drained and proven free of sludge and

accumulated matter. E. All temporary labels, stickers, etc., shall be removed from all fixtures and equipment.

(Do not remove permanent name plates, equipment model numbers, ratings, etc.). F. Heating and air conditioning equipment, tanks, pumps, etc., shall be thoroughly

cleaned and new filters or filter media installed. 1.19 Test and Demonstrations

A. Systems shall be tested and placed in proper working order prior to demonstrating systems to Owner.

B. Prior to acceptance of the mechanical installation, demonstrate to the Owner or his

designated representatives all essential features and functions of all systems installed, and instruct the Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of such systems. The contract shall allow for five (5) working days to perform the demonstrations.

C. Provide necessary trained personnel to perform the demonstrations and instructions.

Provide manufacturer's representatives for systems as required to assist with the demonstrations.

D. Dates and times for performing the demonstrations shall be coordinated with the

Owner. E. Upon completion of demonstrations, provide a certificate testifying that

demonstrations have been completed. Certificate shall list each system

15200-13

demonstrated, dates demonstrations were performed, names of parties in attendance, and shall bear signatures of contractor and owner.

1.20 Painting and Identification

A. Provide painting as scheduled below:

1. Touch-up paint where damaged on equipment furnished with factory applied finished, to match original finish.

2. Identification of mechanical systems shall be as specified in Section 15195;

MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION.

1.21 Excavating, Trenching, and Backfilling

A. Provide excavation necessary for underground water piping, etc., and backfill such trenches and excavations after work has been installed and tested. Care shall be taken in excavating, that walls and footings and adjacent load bearing soils are not disturbed, except where lines must cross under a wall footing. Where a line must pass under footing, the crossing shall be made by the smallest possible trench to accommodate the pipe. Excavation shall be kept free from water by pumping if necessary. No greater length of trench shall be left open, in advance of pipe and utility laying, than that which is authorized.

B. Trenches for piping and utilities located inside foundation walls and to point five (5)

feet outside of the wall shall be not less than sixteen (16) inches nor more than twenty-four (24) inches wider than the outside diameter of the pipe to be laid. The widths of trenches for piping and utilities located more than five (5) feet outside of building foundation walls, other than for sewers, shall be governed by conditions found at the site.

C. Bottoms of trenches shall be so shaped that when pipe is in place the lower fourth of

the circumference for the full length of the barrel will be supported on compacted fill. Bell holes shall be dug so that no part of the weight of the pipe is supported by the bell but shall be no larger than necessary for proper jointing. All sewers and piping required for the structure shall be excavated to at least (6) inches below pipe invert.

D. Immediately after testing and/or inspection, the trench shall be carefully backfilled

with earth free from clods, brick, etc., to a depth one-half the pipe diameter and then firmly puddled and tamped in such a manner as not to disturb the alignment or joints of the pipe. Thereafter, the backfill shall be puddled and tamped every vertical foot.

15200-14

1.22 Concrete Work

A. Provide concrete bases and housekeeping pads for mechanical equipment unless indicated otherwise. Concrete work shall be as specified in the applicable Civil/Site and Structural Sections. Vibration pads, equipment bases, pipe supports and thrust blocks shall be provided by this Contractor.

B. Provide equipment anchor bolts and coordinate their proper installation and accurate

location. 1.23 Access Panels

A. Provide access panels where required and not shown on the drawings for installation by the drywall Contractor. Access panels shall be as specified in the applicable architectural section. All access panel locations which allow access to mechanical equipment shall be approved by the Architect/Engineer.

1.24 Sleeves

A. Sleeves passing through non-load bearing or non-fire rated walls and partitions shall be galvanized sheet steel with lock seam joints of minimum gauges as follows: for pipes 2-1/2" size and smaller - 24 gauge; 3" to 6" - 22 gauge.

B. Sleeves passing through load bearing walls, concrete beams, foundations, footings,

and waterproof floors shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe or cast iron pipe. C. Sleeves for insulated piping shall be of sufficient internal diameter to take pipe and

insulation and to allow for free movement of pipe. Waterproof sleeves shall be of sufficient internal diameter to take pipe and waterproofing material.

D. In finished areas where pipes are exposed, sleeves shall be terminated flush with

wall, partitions, and ceilings, and shall extend 1/2" above finished floors. Extend sleeves 1" above finished floors in areas likely to entrap water.

E. Pipe to wall penetration closures for underground pipe penetrations of walls shall be

"Link-Seal" as manufactured by Thunderline Corporation, or equal. 1.25. Escutcheons

Provide chrome plated escutcheons at each sleeved opening into finished and exposed exterior spaces. Escutcheons shall fit around insulation or around pipe when not insulated; outside diameter shall cover sleeve. Where sleeve extends above finished floor, escutcheon shall be high cap type and shall clear sleeve extension. Secure escutcheons or plates to sleeve but not to insulation with set screws or other approved devices.

15200-15

1.26 Insulation Protection

Where exposed insulated piping extends to floor, provide sheet metal guard around insulation.

1.27 Anchoring of Equipment

All equipment located on floor slab, that is not mounted on wheels and is capable of being moved shall be secured to the floor with anchor bolts. A minimum of two bolts are required per each piece of equipment and bolts shall be of sufficient size to prevent equipment from overturning.

1.28 Protection of Electrical Equipment

Water piping shall not be installed in electrical rooms or directly above electrical equipment. 1.29 Connections for Fixtures and Equipment under Another Section or by Owner

A. Rough all equipment requiring connection to systems provided under this Division. Verify requirements and current locations before proceeding with work.

B. Make all connections to equipment furnished under another Section or by owner as

required to obtain complete and working systems. 1.30 System Guarantee

A. Work required under this Division shall include five-year guarantee. Guarantee by Contractor to Owner to replace for Owner any defective workmanship or material which has been furnished under contract at no cost to the Owner for a period of one year from date of acceptance of systems. Guarantee shall also include all reasonable adjustments of system required for proper operation during guarantee period. Guarantee shall not include normal preventative maintenance services or filters.

B. At "Demonstration", one-year guarantee provision by Contractor shall be explained

to Owner. C. All sealed hermetic refrigeration systems shall be provided with five-year factory

warranty. D. Provide five-year maintenance agreement for all maintenance, inspection normally

recommended for keeping warranty intact.

END OF SECTION

15210-1

SECTION 15210

PLUMBING SMALL VALVES, SPECIALTIES AND SERVICE ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required and install complete and ready for operation all valves and appurtenances as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

B. The work of this Section shall also include the installation of pipe markers and valve

tags furnished by the Contractor. All exposed sanitary process related valves provided under this Contract shall be tagged.

C. The valves included are:

1. Gate valves 2. Ball valves 3. Globe and Angle valves 4. Plug valves 5. Check valves 6. Specialties and accessories

1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

All of the equipment and materials specified herein is intended to be standard for use in controlling the flow of wastewater, sludges, water, gases air or chemicals, depending on the applications.


All of the types of valves and appurtenances shall be products of well established firms who are fully experienced, reputable and qualified in the manufacture of the particular equipment to be furnished. All materials of construction shall be of an acceptable type and shall be designated for the pressure and temperatures at which they are to be operated, for the materials they are to handle and for the use for which they are intended. The materials shall meet established technical standards of quality and strength necessary to assure safe installations and conform to applicable standards. The equipment shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practices and methods and shall comply with these Specifications as applicable.

15210-2

1.04 REFERENCES

A. Standard Building Code B. Standard Plumbing Code

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Copies of all materials required to establish compliance with these Specifications shall be submitted in accordance with the provisions of Division 1, Section 01340. Submittals shall include at least the following:

1. Certified drawings showing all important details of construction and

dimensions. 2. Descriptive literature, bulletins, and/or catalogs of the equipment. 3. The total weight of each item. 4. A complete total bill of materials. 5. A list of the manufacturer's recommended spare parts.

1.06 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Operating and maintenance instructions shall be furnished to the Engineer as provided in Division 1. The instructions shall be prepared specifically for this installation and shall include all required cuts, drawings, equipment lists, description, etc., that are required to instruct operating and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. General

1. All valves and appurtenances shall be of the size shown on the Drawings and as far as possible all equipment of the same type shall be from one manufacturer.

15210-3

2. All valves and appurtenances shall have the name of the maker, flow directional arrows, and the working pressure for which they are designed cast in raised letters upon some appropriate part of the body.

3. Provide suitable handwheels for gate, globe or angle valves.

4. Provide one plug cock wrench for every ten plug cocks sized 2 inches and

smaller, minimum of one. Provide each plug cock size 2-1/2 inches and larger with a wrench, with set screw.

5. For butterfly valves provide lever lock handle with toothed plate for shut-off

service and infinitely adjustable handle with lock nut and memory for throttling service.

6. Except as otherwise shown on the Drawings or specified herein, all valves

with operators located 7 feet or more above the operating floor shall be provided with chain wheel operators complete with chain guides and galvanized steel chain, treated with a rust inhibitor.

7. All buried valves shall open left (counterclockwise). Insofar as possible, all

valves shall open counterclockwise. 8. Article 2.02, Table of Valve Application and Service of this Section of the

Specifications and the Drawings will be used to determine what type of valve is to be used for a particular application.

9. All water system valves shall be lead free.

2.02 TABLE OF VALVE APPLICATION AND SERVICE Application Gate Ball Butterfly Globe Needle Plug Check Throttling X X X Shut-off X X X X Flow-Reversal X Service Class A. Water Service (2 1/2" & 3") X X X X (1) Non-Pot. Wat.Serv. (2) Potable Water (3) Dilution Water (4) Sample Water

15210-4

Application Gate Ball Butterfly Globe Needle Plug Check B. Water Service (2" & Smaller) X X X X X X (1) Non-Pot. Wat. Serv. (2) Potable Water (3) Dilution Water (4) Sample Water C. Natural Gas X X X X 2.03 VALVE CONNECTIONS

A. Provide valves suitable to connect to adjoining piping as specified for pipe joints. Use pipe size valves.

B. Thread pipe sizes 2 inches and smaller. C. Flange pipe sizes 2-1/2 inches and larger. D. Solder or screw to solder adapters for copper tubing. E. Use grooved body valves with mechanical grooved jointed piping.

2.04 GATE VALVES

A. Gate valves shall be used in shut-off applications and where the valves are scheduled for infrequent use.

1. Gate Valves for Water

a. Valves 3 inches and smaller shall be standard brass construction,

rising stem, double disc, parallel seat, with handwheel where exposed or key operator when in the ground. The valves shall be Crane No. 440, Jenkins 62U, or equal.

b. In copper solder joint piping, Chase Style 1334 or equal, gate valves

are preferred with solder joint connections. 2.05 BALL VALVES

A. Ball valves shall normally be used in quick shut-off and frequent use applications.

15210-5

1. Ball Valves for Water Service

a. Ball valves shall be for 125 pound water working pressure, 2 inches and smaller, standard bronze construction, with precision machined bronze ball, twin Buna-N seats, and handle operator with integral stop where exposed. Buried ball valves shall be as above with key or nut operators. Valves shall be Lunkenheimer No. 700 SB, Ford, or equal.

b. Ball valves 3 inches in diameter shall be 150 lb. working pressure,

end entry, corrosion resistant seats and seals, with precision machined bronze ball, with handle operator with integral stop where exposed. Buried ball valves shall be as above with key or nut operator. Valves shall be Lunkenheimer No. 715-T, Ford, or equal.

c. Electric actuators shall be Lunkenheimer or equal according to the

following table:

Valve Size (inches) Actuator Model Number 1/4 through 1/2 E-100-12 3/4 - 1 E-300-12 1-1/4 - 1-1/2 E-600-12 2 - 3 E-1501-12

2.06 GLOBE AND ANGLE VALVES

A. Globe and angle valves shall normally be used for on-off or for throttling purposes where high flow resistances are permissible.

1. Globe and Angle Valves for Water Service

a. Globe and angle valves shall be for 200 pound water working pressure, 3 inches and smaller, standard all bronze construction with brass discs, and handle operator where exposed. Buried valves shall be as above with key or nut operators. Valves shall be Crane No. 1 or 1300, Chase Style 431 or 429, or equal.

2.07 PLUG VALVES

A. Plug valves shall be used for quick shut-off and frequent use applications.

1. Eccentric Plug Valves for Water Service

15210-6

a. Eccentric plug valves shall be for 150 pound water working pressure,

with bronze bodies in sizes 1 inch and smaller, nickel-chromium alloy iron in sizes 1-1/4 inch thru 3 inches, with seats of same material as the body, except for the 3 inch size which shall be nickel alloy. Plugs shall be neoprene rubber faced. Valves shall be DeZurik, Crane or equal.

2.08 CHECK VALVES

A. Check valves shall normally be used for flow reversal prevention. Ball-type check valves should normally be used in corrosive and abrasive atmospheres. Swing-type check valves should be used where flow reversal is infrequent. Lift-type check valves should be used where flow reversal is very frequent.

1. Check Valves for Water

a. Check valves shall be for 200 pound steam pressure, 3 inches and

smaller, standard all bronze swing gate, with bronze disc, for use either in vertical (upward flow) or horizontal position. Valves shall be Crane 34 or 1303, Lunkenheimer, or equal.

2.09 MISCELLANEOUS COCKS

A. Air Release Cocks 1. Air release cocks shall be for 125 pound pressure, 1/2 inch, bronze plug and

body, with handle operator. Air cocks shall be Crane No. 256 Tee Head, Lunkenheimer No. 1571, or equal.

B. Gauge Cocks

1. Gauge cocks for water service shall be for 50 pounds pressure, 1/8 inch to 1/2

inch, brass plug and body, with Tee-type or handle operator. Gauge cocks shall be Crane No. 712, Lunkenheimer No. 1037, or equal. For gauge cocks for plant air and gas service see Division 13 of these Specifications.

C. Try (Sample) Cocks

1. Try cocks shall be for 125 pound pressure, 3/4 inch, with bronze body and

stem, tin disc, and brass bibb, and shall have a handwheel operator. Try cocks shall be Crane No. 730, Lunkenheimer, or equal.

15210-7

D. Plug Cocks

1. Bronze body and plug, screwed ends, Lunkenheimer No. 872; 250 psi WOG, or equal.

2.10 MISCELLANEOUS STOPS

A. Stop and Drain Valves

1. Stop and drain valves shall be for 175 pound working pressure, 180 degrees Fahrenheit, 3/4 inch thru 2 inches, and shall have a positive sealing system accomplished without metal-to-metal fits. O-ring seals shall be attached to a removable plug for ease of replacement. The O-ring seal shall be prelubricated with a long life lubricant. Valves shall have a plastic thrust washer on top of the plug to provide a means of reducing thrust and rotary friction between metal plug, body, and bronze retaining rings. The valve body and plug shall be cast composition bronze ASTM B62-82; O-rings shall be synthetic rubber. Connections shall be as shown on the Drawings. All valves shall be subject to the following tests:

a. 10 psi air test, valve open and closed position submerged in water. No

leaks permitted.

b. 175 psi hydrostatic, valve open and closed. No leaks permitted. Valves shall be Mueller Company Mark II Oriseal Valves, Crane, or equal.

2.11 SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES

A. Faucets (Hose Bibbs)

1. Hose Stations

a. Per Process Drawings. 2. Hose Rack

a. Per Process Drawings.

B. Strainers, Filters, and Dryers

1. Strainers for Water Service

a. Strainers shall be "Y" type with a body made of ASTM A 126-73

Class B steel, sizes 1/4 inch thru 3 inches, rated at 250 pounds steam

15210-8

pressure, with stainless steel screen and screwed ends. Strainers shall be Keckley style "B," Hoffman Series 410, or equal.

C. Vacuum Breakers

1. Vacuum Breakers for Water Service

a. Vacuum breakers shall be designed to prevent back-siphonage of

water lines. Valve types shall be either bottom inlet and side outlet, or top inlet and bottom outlet as required. Internal discs or floats shall be either plastic or silicone. Piping systems with solenoid-operated valves shall require a vacuum breaker with an "O" ring seal. Breakers shall be Sloan No. V-350-A, V-370-A, V-188-A, Wilkins, or equal.

D. Air Vents

1. Air vents shall be used on water lines as shown on the Drawings for the

removal of unwanted air. Vents shall be rated at 150 pounds working water pressure, shall have a safety drain connection, stainless or copper clad steel internal components and a cast iron or brass body and cap. Vents shall be Hoffman No. 78, or equal.

E. Solenoid Valves

1. Solenoid valves shall be packless piston type direct acting, 2-way, valves and

shall be ASCO Valve Red Hat as manufactured by Automatic Switch Co., or equal.

2. Valves on water seal lines to stuffing boxes and for flushing water shall be of

the normally closed type. 3. Valves on the plant water seal lines shall have forged brass bodies, NPT end

connections of the size shown on the Drawings, 300 or 400 series stainless steel internal parts, and Buna N or Ethylene Propylene valve seats. Valves shall have a 150 psig (minimum) safe working pressure and zero minimum operating pressure differential. Water supply system for pipe connections shall be threaded with nipples for the plant water lines and flanged with threaded stainless steel adapters for the PVC lines.

4. Except as otherwise specified herein, valves shall have NEMA 4 solenoid

enclosures, shall be suitable for operation on a 120V, 60 Hz, single phase power supply, and shall be provided with a continuous duty Class F coil and a manual operator.

15210-9

5. Valves located in hazardous areas, as noted on the Drawings, shall be furnished with explosion proof enclosures suitable for Class I, Division I, Group D locations.

F. Dielectric Pipe Couplings

1. Dielectric pipe couplings shall be used wherever copper pipe connects to steel or cast iron pipe and appurtenances. Couplings shall have steel bodies with non-conducting bushings on both ends. Ends shall have standard pipe threads. Couplings shall be rated for at least 200 psi at 225|o\F. Couplings shall be as manufactured by Thermodynamics Corporation, Needham, MA, Water Vallett Company, Detroit, MI, or equal.

I. Valve Boxes shall be specified in Section 15116. J. Drain Valves

1. Bronze lever cock; nipple and cap or hose thread; Lunkenheimer No. 472 or

equal, 250 psi working steam pressure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. All valves and appurtenances shall be installed in the locations shown, true to alignment and rigidly supported. Any damage to the above items shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER before they are installed.

B. Control valves in all locations shall be so grouped and located that they may be easily

operated, through access panels, doors, or adjacent to equipment. C. After installation, all valves and appurtenances shall be tested at least one hour at the

working pressure corresponding to the class of pipe, unless a different test pressure is specified. If any joint proves to be defective, it shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER.

D. Install all brackets, extension rods, guides, the various types of operators and

appurtenances as shown on the Drawings that in masonry floors or walls, and install concrete inserts for hangers and supports as soon as forms are erected and before concrete is poured. Before setting these items, the CONTRACTOR shall check all Drawings and figures which have a direct bearing on their location and he shall be responsible for the proper location of these valves and appurtenances during the construction of the structures.

15210-10

E. All materials shall be carefully inspected for defects in workmanship and materials; all debris and foreign material cleaned out of valve openings, etc.; all operating mechanisms operated to check their proper functioning, and all nuts and bolts checked for tightness. Valves and other equipment which do not operate easily, or are otherwise defective, shall be repaired or replaced at no additional cost to the OWNER.

F. Fire hydrants and yard hydrants shall be set at the locations as shown on the

Drawings and bedded on a firm foundation. G. Buried valves and valve boxes shall be set with the stem vertically aligned in the

center of the gate box. Valves shall be set on a firm foundation and supported by tamping selected excavated material under the sides of the valve. The valve box shall be supported during backfilling and maintained in vertical alignment with the top flush with finish grade.

H. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.

3.02 SHOP PAINTING

A. Interior surfaces of all valves, the exterior surfaces of buried valves and miscellaneous piping appurtenances shall be given a shop finish of an asphalt varnish conforming to Federal Specification T-V-51e for Varnish Asphalt.

B. The exterior surface of various parts of valves, operators, floorstands and

miscellaneous piping shall be thoroughly cleaned of all scale, dirt, grease or other foreign matter and thereafter one shop coat of an approved rust-inhibitive primer such as Inertol Primer No. 621 shall be applied in accordance with the instructions of the paint manufacturer.

C. Ferrous surfaces obviously not to be painted shall be given a shop coat of grease or

other suitable rust-resistant coating. D. Field painting is specified under Division 9.

3.03 INSPECTION AND TESTING

A. The various pipelines in which the valves and appurtenances are to be installed are specified to be field tested. During these tests any defective valve or appurtenance shall be adjusted, removed and replaced, or otherwise made acceptable to the ENGINEER.

B. Various regulating valves, strainer, or other appurtenances shall be tested to

demonstrate their conformance with the specified operational capabilities and any

15210-11

deficiencies shall be corrected or the device replaced or otherwise made acceptable to the ENGINEER.

END OF SECTION

15258-1

SECTION 15258

DUCTWORK INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Work of this section shall include providing the thermal insulation for mechanical

systems and shall include the following principal items:

1. Supply, Return, Outside, and Relief Air ductwork concealed.

2. Supply, Return, Outside, and Relief Air ductwork exposed.

3. Supply, Return, Outside, and Relief Air ductwork concealed outside of building insulation envelope (attic/crawlspace).

4. Exhaust Air ductwork concealed.

5. Exhaust Air ductwork exposed.

6. Lined ductwork.

7. Generator exhaust ductwork.

B. Not all of the insulation types specified herein may be required on this project. The contractor is only to provide those insulation types required for the applications on this project.

C. This work shall be performed by a competent insulation contractor regularly engaged

in the scope of work described herein. 1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals and product literature for each insulation type, finish type, and equipment

served. Provide submittals on method of installation for each type of insulation used.

15258-2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 THERMAL INSULATION

A. All insulating systems shall be tested on a composite basis in accordance with NFPA and UL 723 and shall have a maximum flame spread rating of 25 and a maximum smoke developed rating of 50 under ASTM E-84.

B. Insulation Types:

1. FIBERGLASS BLANKET

Made of flame - attenuated glass fibers, bonded with a thermosetting resin. Reinforced with fiberglass scrim facing laminated to UL rated kraft. FSK facing, .02 perms, .00035" foil thickness per ASTM E-96, procedure A. 2" thick, 0.75 PCF, 7.1 R value. Equal to Manville, MicroLite.

2. RIGID FIBERGLASS

3 lb. density, .23 k factor. Mil spec HH-1-558B.. Inorganic glass fibers bonded by a thermosetting resin with an FSK jacket in compliance with NFPA 90A AND 90B standards. Equal to Manville 814, 3 lb density, 2" thick with FSK jacket.

1. FIBERGLASS BLANKET

Made of flame - attenuated glass fibers, bonded with a thermosetting resin. Reinforced with fiberglass scrim facing laminated to UL rated kraft. FSK facing, .02 perms, .00035" foil thickness per ASTM E-96, procedure A. 3" thick, 3/4 lb., 10.7 R value. Equal to Manville, Microlite.

2. SEMI RIGID FIBERGLASS BOARD

3lb. density, thermal conductivity compliance ASTM C 518, 650 degrees F temperature limit, 1 1/2" thick. High temperature fiberglass bonded to a flexible jacketing. Jacketing is a laminate of white kraft and aluminum foil, reinforced with fiberglass, chemically treated for fire and smoke safety. Equal to Manville Pipe and Tank Insulation.

3. DUCT LINER

Acoustical and thermal insulation manufactured from long textile, type glass fibers firmly bonded together with a thermosetting resin. Air stream surface is coated to protect against air erosion. Up to 250 degrees F (ASTM C 411),

15258-3

NFPA 90A and 90B, ASTM C 1071: not greater than 0.5% moisture by volume at 120 degrees F and 96% RH. Equal to Certainteed 1" thick, type 150, .28 K value for up to 2,500 FPM velocity.

4. DUCT LINER

Same as number 5 except type 300, 1" thick, .24 K factor, up to 6000 FPM.

5. CALCIUM SILICATE

ASTM C533, Type I indoor only, or outdoors above 250 degrees F pipe temperature. Supply insulation with the manufacturer's recommended factory-applied jacket/vapor barrier.

B. Weather Barrier Mastics

1. An emulsion type material compounded of selected and processed bitumens

and mineral fillers. Equal to INSULKOTE ET. and INSULKOTE PRIMER E.

C. Duct Tape

1. FSK, glass fiber impregnated with foil facing, 4"wide, M.L spec HHB100,

25/50, ASTM E-84.

D. Adhesives

1. Water based adhesives for attaching low density fibrous insulation and duct liner to metal. Service temperature limits-20 degrees F to 250 degrees F, UL MJAT-2, ASTM C 916, type 11, NFDA 90A and 90B. Equal to Foster Quick Tack Adhesive 85-60.

E. Stainless Steel Jackets

1. ASTM A167 or ASTM A240/A240M; Type 304, minimum thickness of 33

gauge ( 0.010 inch), smooth surface with factory-applied polyethylene and kraft paper moisture barrier on inside surface. Provide stainless steel bands, minimum width of 1/2 inch

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 WORKMANSHIP

A. All materials shall be applied by Workmen skilled in this trade. Unsightly work shall

be cause for rejection.

15258-4

B. Mechanical fasteners shall be used whenever possible to assure permanent construction.

C. Materials shall be applied only after systems have been tested and all surfaces are

clean and dry.

E. All insulation of cold surfaces shall be vapor sealed. All joints, laps, breaks and faults in vapor barriers of insulations covering cold surfaces shall be thoroughly sealed.

F. Insulation that becomes wet for any reason shall be removed, replaced and resealed at

the expense of this Contractor. 3.02 APPLICATION

A. Interior, Concealed Rectangular or Round Ductwork in conditioned or non-

conditioned spaces.

Use FIBERGLASS BLANKET as per Part 2, 2.01, B-1. For rectangular ducts with any one dimension not greater than 24". Insulation shall be wrapped around ducts and secured with outward clinching staples at 4 inches o.c.. Ducts 24 inches and greater shall have insulation additionally secured with stick clips on 18 inch centers or with 4 inch wide bands of adhesive applied on 18 inch centers. Insulation shall be lapped a minimum of 4" and all seams and penetrations shall be sealed with FSK Duct tape as per Part 2, 2.01, D-1.

B. Rectangular, Interior Supply, Return, Outside Relief and Exhaust Air Ductwork,

Exposed in conditioned spaces.

Use FIBERGLASS BOARD insulation as per Part 2, 2.01, B-2, and shall be applied to ducts with mechanical fasteners such as stick cups or weld pins at 12 inch centers. Install fiberglass board in full pieces. Joints and seams shall be covered with 4" tape as per Part 2, 2.01, D-1. Where standing seams or angle supports exceed insulation thickness an additional layer of board will be used.

C. Round, Interior Supply, Return, Outside, Exhaust and Relief Ductwork Exposed in conditioned space.

Round ductwork use SEMI RIGID FIBERGLASS BOARD as per Part 2, 2.01, B-4. Flexible fiberboard shall be applied to ducts with outward clinching staples. Make any fabrication cuts to accommodate the proper fitting of the insulation before stapling. In addition any rectangular ducts with a width of 24" or greater shall employ the use of stick clips spaced at 12" o.c. Joints, seams and any penetrations shall be sealed with matching tape.

15258-5

D. Supply, Return, Outside, Relief or Exhaust Ductwork Outside of Building Insulation in non-conditioned space.

Use FLEXIBLE FIBERGLASS INSULATION as per Part 2, 2.01, B-3. Ductwork shall be wrapped and secured with outward clinching staples at 4 inches o.c. Ducts 24" and wider shall have the insulation additionally secured with stick on clips on 18" centers. Insulation shall be lapped 4" and all seams and penetrations shall be vapor sealed with FSK tape (Part 2, 2.01, D-1).

E. Supply, Return, Outside, Relief and Exhaust Ductwork Indicated on the Plans to be

Lined.

Use DUCT LINER (Part 2, 2.01, C-5), (Part 2, 2.01, B-5 or B-6), and (Part 2, 2.01, E-1). Liner shall be attached to metal using adhesive covering 90% of the metal. All edges of liner facing the direction of airflow and not receiving metal nosing shall be coated with adhesive. Liner shall be neatly butted without gaps at transverse joints and shall be coated with adhesive at such joints.

Liner shall be folded and compressed in the corners of rectangular duct sections or shall be cut and fit to assure butted edge overlapping. Longitudinal joints in duct liner shall not occur except at the corners of ducts unless the size of the duct and standard liner product dimensions make such necessary.

Interior widths of duct not exceeding 8" do not require mechanical fasteners in addition to adhesive.

Interior widths of duct exceeding 8" will require mechanical fasteners as follows:

Velocity

Transversely Around Perimeter

Longitudinally

2500 fpm 4" from 3" from dn corners and at

intervals not exceeding 12"

transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18”

2501 fpm 3" from 3" from to corners and at transverse joints 6000 fpm intervals not

exceeding 6" and at intervals not exceeding 16”

Mechanical fasteners will be applied with an approved mechanical fastening system. Hand driven pins with hammers will not be approved. Weld pins or "Grip Nails" or

15258-6

equal.

Longitudinal joints in liner shall be coated with adhesive at velocities over 2500 fpm.

Metal nosing that are either channel or zee profile or are integrally-formed from the duct wall shall be securely installed over transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream at fan discharge and at any interval of lined duct preceded by unlined duct. In addition, where velocities exceed 4000 fpm metal nosing shall be used on upstream edges of liner at every transverse joint.

Where dampers, turning vane assemblies or other devices are placed inside of lined duct or fittings, the installation must not damage the liner or cause erosion of the liner. The use of metal hat sections or other buildout means is optional; when used, buildouts shall be secured to the duct wall with bolts, screws, rivets or welds.

Ductwork indicated to be lined shall be lined accordingly:

1. Up to 2,500 FPM velocity (Part 2, 2.01, B-5)

2. 2,500 FPM to 6,000 FPM velocity (Part 2, 2.01, B-6)

F. Relief or Exhaust Ductwork Outside of Building Insulation in non-conditioned space

and serving only that non-conditioned space shall not require insulation.

G. Generator Exhaust System

1. Use calcium silicate insulation (Part 2, 2.01, B-7).

2. Insulation shall be cut to fit the contour of the equipment and secured by means of 16 gauge SS T-304 wire strap on 9” centers. Insulation shall be installed in two equal layers with each separately wire strapped. Layers shall be offset and staggered in all directions such that the outer layer covers the joints of the inner layer. Install an outer T-304 SS smooth sheet jacket (Part 2, 2.01, F-1) using minimum axial and radial overlap of 2-inches. Secure SS jacket using ½” wide by 0.015 thick SS T-304 bands at 9-inch centers. Use manufacturer’s recommended adhesive and insulating cement.

3.03 MISCELLANEOUS

A. Ductwork indicated on the drawings to be internally lined shall not be insulated

externally.

B. All insulating systems described herein shall conform to the latest edition of SMACNA and will comply with Florida Codes, NFPA-90A, 90B, 30; TIMA AHC- 101; ASTM C390, C167, C553, E84, C177, C423, C411, C916, D903, D93, D1151;

15258-7

ASHRAE; ACGIH; Tested for UL 181; Mil Spec A 3316B

C. The engineer will reserve the right to accept or reject any and all work not in compliance with the aforementioned. The engineer will be contacted for inspection during any of the following operations:

1. During installation of any ductwork wrapping.

2. During the installation of ductwork that has been lined.

- END OF SECTION -

15264-1

SECTION 15264

INSULATION FOR PLUMBING SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Work of this section shall include the thermal insulation for plumbing systems andshall include the following principal items:

N/A – denotes: not applicable this project.

1. Traps, trap arms, cold and hot water supplies2. Traps on condensate receiving floor drains above grade3. Equipment4. Hot water piping below grade5. Domestic cold water, domestic hot water, and non-potable water

B. This work shall be performed by a competent insulation contractor regularly engagedin the scope of work described herein.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide submittals consisting of product literature for each insulation type, finishtype and equipment served. Provide submittals on method of installation for eachtype of insulation used.

B. Product samples and installation samples are required and shall be provided at thediscretion of the engineer. Samples may include but are not limited to, 90o Ells, 45o

Ells, valves and sections of pipe.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. All insulating systems shall be tested on a composite basis in accordance with ASTME-84, NFPA 255 and UL 723. All material shall be finished with surfaces having amaximum flame spread rating of 25 and a maximum smoke developed rating of 50and under ASTM E-84.

B. Interior piping Rigid Fiberglass - .23K Factor, 3# density, minimum R Factor 4.3suitable for 0oF, Federal compliance HH-1-558B, flame spread rating 25, maximumsmoke developed rating 50. Equal to Owens Corning - Fiberglass ASJ/S1-11.

15264-2

C. Interior Fittings 1/2 and 3/4 may use job built mitered fittings of similar material aspiping. Fittings 1 inch and up will use fitting insulation system composed of a precutfiberglass insulation blanket for wrapping the pipe fitting and a preformed, white,snap-on type, molded PVC jacket cover. Stainless steel tack fasteners hold the covertogether at the overlapping throat seam. Matching white, pressure sensitive tapeseals and finishes of the fitting and adjacent pipe insulation joint. Equal toCertainteed Snap Form Fitting System.

D. Above ground exterior piping shall be equal to Foamglass - .33K factor suitable for900oF, Federal Compliance PBS-A-1516, 8.5 # density per square foot. Equal toPittsburgh Corning - Strata - Fab system with ASJ jacket.

E. Fitting for above ground exterior piping shall be machine formed, routed and fittedfor specific size fitting and of same material as in D.

F. Below ground exterior piping shall be of same materials as D except without ASJjacket.

G. Below ground exterior fittings shall be of same material as in D except without ASJjacket.

H. Fiberglass blanket made of flame-attenuated glass fibers, bonded with athermosetting resin. Reinforced with fiberglass scrim facing laminated to UL ratedKraft. FSK facing, .02 perms, .00035" foil thickness. Per ASTM E96, Procedure A.2" thick, 0.75 PCF, 7.1 R value. Equal to Manville, MicroLite.

I. Closed cell, flexible elastomeric thermal insulation, black in color, supplied in unslittubing, equal to Armaflex AP 2000.

J. Semi-Rigid Fiberglass Board

Semi-rigid fiberglass board, 3 lb density, thermal conductivity compliance ASTM C165, 650oF temperature limit, 1 1/2" thick. High temperature fiberglass bonded to aflexible jacketing. Jacketing is to be laminated of white Kraft and aluminum foil,reinforced with fiberglass, chemically treated for fire and smoke safety. Equal toManville Pipe and Tank insulation.

2.02 INSULATION FINISH MATERIALS

A. White all Service (ASJ) conforming to Federal Specification HHB-100B.

B. Glass fabric equal to Foster Mast-A-Fab.

C. Corrugated Aluminum 0.016 inches thickness with corrugations no greater than 3/16"

15264-3

deep, Equal to Pabco for interior use. Exterior shall be smooth finish.

D. Aluminum fitting corners (smooth or corrugated as required), precision formed,smooth and mar-free finish, 0.024 inches thick. Equal to Pabco.

E. Roofing Felt, 15 lb.

F. Black asphaltic cutback mastic for underground or outdoor use. Equal to Foster C.I.Mastic 60-25, Mil spec Mil-C-82052.

2.03 ADHESIVES

A. An air drying contact adhesive specifically designed for joining seams and ends ofArmaflex AP-2000 in Specification Section 2-2.01 I. Comply with Mil Spec. Mil-AO-24179A and Amend - 2 as Type II, Class I. Equal to Armstrong 520 Adhesive.

2.04 FINISHES

A. A white elastomeric, UL classified outdoor grade, vinyl mastic for finished outdoorinsulation. Water based latex enamel; equal to WB Armaflex Finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 WORKMANSHIP

A. All materials shall be applied by workmen skilled in this trade. Unsightly work shallbe cause for rejection.

B. Mechanical fasteners shall be used whenever possible to assure permanentconstruction.

C. Materials shall be applied only after systems have been tested and all surfaces areclean and dry.

D. Cellular glass block supports or other suitable non-compressible insulation materialequal in thickness to the insulation and three times the pipe diameter in length shallbe installed at hangers to eliminate through-metal conductance. Provide 18 GA, 180degree, galvanized sheet metal saddles same length as block supports.

E. All insulation of cold surfaces shall be vapor sealed. All joints, laps, breaks, andfaults in vapor barriers of insulations covering cold surfaces, shall be thoroughlysealed.

F. Insulation that becomes wet for any reason shall be removed, replaced and resealed atthe expense of this Contractor.

15264-4

G. Piping systems requiring testing to be witnessed by the Architect shall not beinsulated until such systems have been tested and approved.

H. Do not insulate any moving parts; valve handles, expansion tanks or backflowpreventers.

3.02 APPLICATION

A. Insulation application schedule

NOMINAL PIPESIZE

INTERIOR EXTERIORABOVE GRADE

EXTERIORBELOW GRADE

1/2" - 1" 1/2" 1" 1/2"

1 1/4" - 2 1/2" 1" 1 1/2" 1"

3" and above 1 1/2" 2" 1 1/2"

B. Rigid Fiberglass Insulation

For interior domestic cold, hot & recirculating

1. PipingAll insulation shall be butted together and securely stapled in place withoutward clinching staples on 3" centers. Factory provided laps of 4" wideASJ tape of same type as jacket on insulation shall be used on butt joints asper (Part 2-2.01-B)

2. FittingsFittings 1/2 and 3/4 may use job-built mitered fittings of similar materials aspiping. Miter the pipe section of insulation at 45o angle, butt opposing endstogether firmly, sealing any gaps. Apply 4" wide ASJ tape of same type asjacket to joint. Fittings 1" and above shall use fiberglass insert covered withsnap on PVC jacket and matching white tape on adjacent pipe insulation asper (Part 2-2.01-C). Wrap precut insulation - pieces around fittings (90o Ells,tees, etc.). Position points of insulation on the underside (short radius ofelbow), snap on fitting PVC jacket and secure with manufacturer providedstainless steel serrated shaft thumb tacks. Seal ends of PVC jacket adjoiningpipe insulation with manufacturer provided white tape sealant.

C. Traps, trap arms, cold water and hot water supplies on all lavatories where exposed.

15264-5

1. Provide Trap Wrap Protective Kit 500R by Brocar or approved equal forlavatory P-Trap and angle stop assemblies. Abrasion resistant exterior covershall be smooth and have 1/8 inch minimum wall over cushioned foam insert.Fasteners shall remain substantially out of sight.

D. Traps on condensate receiving floor drains above grade.

Wrap traps, and hub on floor drain, trap sizes with flexible fiberglass blanket as per(Part 2-2.01 H). Insulation shall be wrapped around pipe and secured with outwardclinching staples. Furthermore, insulation shall be attached to hub of floor drain viamechanical fasteners. All edges of insulation shall be turned and FSK tape shall beapplied for a neat and vapor sealed installation.

E. Hot water piping below grade

1. Underground hot water pipe and fitting shall use the following schedule ofsizes (see Part 3-3.02 A).

2. Provide Foamglass insulation for underground hot water piping as per (Part2-2.01 F). Underground piping insulation shall be applied over a clean drysurface. Provide 22 ga. galvanized wire at 12" O.C. Cover impregnated feltand stagger joints at midpoint. Apply sealant at joints, laps and seams.Secure felt with wire at 12" O.C. with 22 ga. galvanized wire. Apply tackcoat over felt at not less than 4 gal. per 100 square feet. Embed clothmembrane into wet tack coat. Smooth membrane to avoid wrinkles andoverlap seams at least 2". Apply a finish coat at 8 gallons per 100 square feetmaking certain that membrane is fully covered. Allow 8 hours of drying timebefore any piping is covered.

3. Underground fittings shall be installed as described above. Provide materialsas per (Part 2-2.01 G).

F. Cold, hot water, hot water recirculating and non-potable water piping above gradeexposed and concealed.

1. Above grade exterior cold and hot water shall be insulated with Foamglass asper (Part 2-2.01 D). Fittings shall be as in (Part 2-2.01 E).

2. Piping

All insulation shall be applied over a clean dry surface. Factory provided lapsof 4" wide ASJ tape of same type as jacket on insulation shall be used on buttjoints. All laps and penetrations shall be sealed with a vapor barrier masticfinish.

15264-6

3. Fittings

Fitting insulation shall be covered with two coats of vapor barrier mastic withan intermediate layer of glass fabric.

4. All above grade piping shall be covered with aluminum. Aluminum shall beapplied to a clean dry surface. Overlap butt joints 4" and apply 1/2" widebands of aluminum on 12" O.C. and at each end of fittings. On exteriorpiping, the longitudinal seam shall be located at the bottom center of pipingand turned 1/4" down for a drip edge. All joints on exterior piping shall bemade water tight with suitable silicone caulking. Caulking is to be applied tojoints prior to bands being installed.

G. All interior exposed piping and fittings located in manufacturing areas, mechanicalrooms, etc. below 7'0" AFF shall also be wrapped with 0.016 corrugated aluminum asper (Part 2-2.02 C and D). Provide 1/2" wide aluminum bands located at a maximumof 12" O.C.

3.03 MISCELLANEOUS

A. This contractor will contact the engineer prior to start of all phases of work asfollows:

1. Installation of underground insulation.

2. Exterior above grade installation.

3. Interior insulation installation.

B. The engineer will ascertain the continuation of work subject to the requirementsaforementioned.

C. Contractor shall provide proper identification of all installed piping per specificationrequirements in section 15195.

END OF SECTION

15268-1

SECTION 15268

INSULATION FOR REFRIGERANT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Work of this section shall include providing the thermal insulation for mechanicalsystems and shall include the following principal items:

Refrigerant Suction Line

B. This work shall be performed by competent workmen regularly engaged in the scopeof work described herein.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals and product literature for each insulation type, finish type and equipmentserved, shall be required. Provide submittals on method of installation for each typeof insulation used.

B. Product samples and installation samples are required and shall be provided at thediscretion of the engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. All insulating systems shall be tested on a composite basis in accordance with NFPAand UL 723 and shall have a maximum flame spread rating of 25 and a maximumsmoke developed rating of 50 under ASTM E-84.

2.02 INSULATION TYPES

A. Closed cell, flexible elastomeric thermal insulation, black in color, supplied in unslittubing. Equal to Armaflex AP 2000.

B. Closed cell, elastomeric thermal insulation tape. Commonly supplied in 2" X 1/8"thick. Equal to Armaflex insulation tape.

15268-2

2.03 ADHESIVES

A. An air drying contact adhesive specifically designed for joining seams and ends ofArmaflex AP-2000 in specification section 2.02-A. Comply with Mil Spec. Mil-A-24179A and Amend-2 as type 11, class 1. Equal to Armstrong 520 adhesive.

2.04 FINISHES

A. A white, elastomeric, UL classified outdoor grade, vinyl mastic for finished outdoorinsulation. Water based latex enamel. Equal to WB Armaflex finish.

B. Provide aluminum or stainless steel jackets over insulation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 WORKMANSHIP

A. All materials shall be applied by Workmen skilled in this trade. Unsightly work shallbe cause for rejection.

B. Mechanical fasteners shall be used whenever possible to assure permanentconstruction.

C. Materials shall be applied only after systems have been tested and all surfaces areclean and dry.

D. Cellular glass block supports or other suitable non-compressible insulation materialequal in thickness to the insulation and three times the pipe diameter in length shallbe installed at hangers to eliminate through-metal conductance. Provide 18 GA, 180degree, galvanized sheet metal saddles same length as block supports.

E. All insulation of cold surfaces shall be vapor sealed. All joints, laps, breaks andfaults in vapor barriers of insulations covering cold surfaces shall be thoroughlysealed.

F. Insulation that becomes wet for any reason shall be removed, replaced and resealed atthe expense of this Contractor.

G. Piping systems requiring tests to be witnessed by the Architect shall not be insulateduntil such systems have been tested and approved.

15268-3

3.02 APPLICATION

A. Insulation shall be butted together and adhered in place with joint adhesive (see Part2, 2.03, A). All joints and seams shall be sealed with contact adhesive. Wherepossible insulation shall be slipped on without slitting. Insulation shall be buttedfirmly to equipment. Short radius elbows shall be mitered, adhesive applied andfirmly held together until the adhesive hardens sufficiently to prevent separation.

B. Paint all exposed insulation with Armaflex white paint (see Part 2, 2.04, A).

C. Provide sheet metal saddles for all insulated refrigerant piping at pipe supports.

3.03 INSULATION THICKNESS

A. Provide 3/4" thick insulation materials for all refrigerant suction line piping.

3.04 MISCELLANEOUS

A. This contractor will contact the engineer at the start of all phases of work, as follows:

1. During installation of any concealed insulation.

2. During installation of above ceiling insulation work.

B. The engineer will ascertain the continuation of work subject to the requirementsaforementioned.

END OF SECTION

15300-1

SECTION 15300

SPRINKLERS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes fire-suppression sprinklers, piping, and equipment for the following building systems:

1. Wet fire-suppression sprinkler systems, including piping, valves,

specialties, automatic sprinklers, and accessories.

B. Work Included:

1. The system shall include all sprinklers, piping drain risers, cabinets, hangers, seismic bracing, alarms as required for a complete system. Buildings or areas will be fully sprinkled (exception only as per local code).

2. All areas will be supplied from a sprinkler riser system.

3. Areas exposed to freezing temperatures will have dry type sprinklers.

4. Before any work is commenced, shop drawings shall be carefully prepared

and submitted for approval. It is required that the sprinkler systems be sized hydraulically in accordance with NFPA standards. Submit hydraulic calculation of each system with shop drawings showing balanced system delivery, and balanced supply and demand for the appropriate hazard class as defined in NFPA 13, 2010 edition. Such drawings and calculations must be reviewed and approved by all governing authorities, Fire Department, and Owners Insurance Underwriters.

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 23 Section 23 00 01, “Seismic Wind, and Flood Load Design”.

2. Division 26 Section "Fire Alarm Systems" for alarm devices not in this Section.

15300-2

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Working Plans: Documents, including drawings, calculations, and material specifications prepared according to NFPA 13 for obtaining approval from authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Automatic: As applied to fire protection devices, is a device or system providing

an emergency function without the necessity for human intervention and activated as a result of a predetermined temperature rise, rate of temperature rise, or combustion products.

C. Automatic Sprinkler System: A sprinkler system, for fire protection purposes, is an

integrated system of underground and overhead piping designed in accordance with fire protection engineering standards. The system includes a suitable water supply. The portion of the system above the ground is a network of specially sized or hydraulically designed piping installed in a structure or area, generally overhead, and to which automatic sprinklers are connected in a systematic pattern. The system is usually activated by heat from a fire and discharges water over the fire area.

D. Fire Protection System: Approved devices, equipment and systems or

combinations of systems used to detect a fire, activate an alarm, extinguish or control a fire, control or manage smoke and products of a fire or any combination thereof.

E. Initiating Device: A system component that originates transmission of a

change-of-state condition, such as in a smoke detector, manual fire alarm box, or supervisory switch.

F. Listed: Equipment, materials or services included in a list published by an

organization acceptable to the code enforcement official and concerned with evaluation of products or services that maintains periodic inspection of production of listed equipment or materials or periodic evaluation of services and whose listing states either that the equipment, material or service meets identified standards or has been tested and found suitable for a specified purpose

G. Record Drawings: Drawings ("as builts") that document the location of all

devices, appliances, wiring, sequences, wiring methods, and connections of the components of a fire alarm system as installed.

H. NPS: National Pipe Standard.

1.04 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Design sprinkler piping according to Local Code and to the following and obtain

approval from authorities having jurisdiction:

1. Include 10 percent margin of safety for available water flow and pressure.

15300-3

2. Include losses through water-service piping, valves, and backflow preventers.

3. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications: Shall be per Local Code,

NFPA, and Requirements of the Authority having Jurisdiction. In the absence of more restrictive requirements, the following classifications shall apply:

a. Administration Area: Light Hazard.

b. Chemical Storage & Pump Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 2.

4. Minimum Density for Automatic Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Design: Shall be as

follows:)

a. Light-Hazard Occupancy: 0.10 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area.

b. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 0.20 gpm over 1500- sq. ft. area.

5. Sprinkler design area shall be increased 30% for sloped ceilings with a pitch

exceeding 1 in 6 (a roof slope of 16.7 %).

6. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: Shall be in accordance with the sprinkler listing or as follows:

a. Office Space: 225 sq. ft.

b. Chemical Storage & Pump Rooms: 130 sq. ft.

c. Other Areas: According to NFPA 13 recommendations, unless

otherwise indicated.

B. Components and Installation: Capable of producing piping systems with 175-psig minimum working-pressure rating, unless otherwise indicated.

C. The sprinklers in all areas are to be installed in the center of the tile or centered with

lights, diffusers or similar elements as indicated on the architectural reflected ceiling drawings. Sprinklers must also be installed on a true axis line in both directions with a maximum deviation from the axis line of ½" plus or minus. At the completion of the installation, if any sprinklers are found to exceed the above mentioned tolerance, same shall be removed and reinstalled by this Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.

D. Provide all sprinklers and work in strict conformance with approved shop

drawings. The Architect and/or Design Engineer reserves the right to reject any and all work not in accordance with the approved shop drawing.

E. Whether or not the system shown on the Contract Drawings meets the requirements

of the National Fire Protection Association, these specifications require the

15300-4

furnishing and installation of sprinkler systems complete in all details and in accordance with the standards of the National Fire Protection Association.

F. Perform the following in areas where painting occurs or when sprinkler piping is

painted. As soon as sprinklers are in place and the Contractor shall cover each head with a small bag of an Underwriter's approved type, which shall be removed only after all painting is complete. After the bag is removed, all heads shall be cleaned and polished.

G. Hydraulic Calculations: Submit hydraulic calculations as part of the shop

drawings. Prepare hydraulic calculations in accordance with NFPA 13 and the design criteria indicated on the drawings with the following exceptions:

1. Minimum operating pressure of any sprinkler shall be according to NFPA

13 and UL listed.

2. Pipe friction losses may be calculated by using the nearest foot for all piping over one foot in length. Horizontal lengths less than one foot may be neglected. Vertical length less than one foot shall be included for elevation purposes only.

3. Flows shall be calculated to the nearest whole gallon.

4. Velocity pressures may be neglected.

5. Provide a minimum 10 percent pressure differential between the available

water supply and total system demand of the calculated sprinkler flow plus hose demand at residual pressure required for system.

6. Refer to sprinkler design criteria on drawings for additional information.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. Pipe and fitting materials and methods of joining for sprinkler piping.

2. Pipe hangers, supports, seismic bracing and restraints.

3. Valves, including specialty valves, accessories, and devices.

4. Alarm devices. Include electrical data.

5. Sprinklers, escutcheons, and guards. Include sprinkler flow characteristics, mounting, finish, and other pertinent data.

B. Fire-Hydrant Flow Test Report: This information is necessary to provide hydraulic

calculations.

C. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction. Include hydraulic calculations, for all applicable systems. Plans and calculations must be

15300-5

signed and stamped by a professional fire protection engineer registered in the State of Florida.

D. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for

compliance with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping" and "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Underground Piping."

E. Record/ As-Built Drawings: Submit record/as-built drawings to the Architect and

Engineer for approval. The drawings are to contain all the information required for working plans in accordance with NFPA 13.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of sprinkler specialty to include

in maintenance manuals. Include a copy of NFPA 25.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has designed and installed fire-suppression piping similar to that indicated for this Project and obtained design approval and inspection approval from authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field

test reports by a qualified professional engineer. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.

C. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally

qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of fire-suppression piping that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

D. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firms whose equipment, specialties, and

accessories are listed by product name and manufacturer in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" and that comply with other requirements indicated.

E. Sprinkler Components: Listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking by a

testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. All components shall be domestically produced by reputable manufacturer with all certificates in place. Components of questionable quality or origin shall not be used.

F. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined

in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

G. NFPA Standards: In addition to Local Code Requirements, all Equipment,

specialties, accessories, installation, and testing complying with the following:

1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."

15300-6

1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounting steel cabinet and hinged

cover, with space for a minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include the number of sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and wrench for sprinklers. Include separate cabinet with sprinklers and wrench for each type of sprinkler on Project. Unless otherwise noted, the cabinet shall be located in the incoming fire service valve room.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by

one of the following:

1. Specialty Valves and Devices:

a. Vicatulic Co.

b. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corp.

c. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.

d. Tyco Fire Products

e. Viking Corp.

2. Water-Flow Indicators and Supervisory Switches:

a. System Sensor

b. Potter Electric Signal Co.

3. Sprinkler, Drain and Alarm Test Fittings:

a. Fire-End and Croker Corp.

b. AFG Manufacturing, Inc.

c. Victaulic Co.

4. Sprinkler, Branch-Line Test Fittings:

15300-7

a. AFG Manufacturing, Inc.

b. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc.

c. Fire-End and Croker Corp.

d. Potter Roemer.

5. Sprinkler, Inspector's Test Fittings:

a. Croker Corp.

b. Victualic Co.

6. Sprinklers:

a. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corp.

b. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.

c. Viking Corp.

d. Victaulic Co.

e. Tyco Fire Products

2.02 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Refer to part 3.2 of this Section for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials.

2.03 PIPES

A. Refer to Part 3.2 of this Section.

2.04 PIPE FITTINGS


2.05 JOINING MATERIALS


B. Refer to valve manufacturers listed in this document for gate, ball, butterfly, globe, and check valves not required to be UL listed.

2.06 FIRE-PROTECTION-SERVICE VALVES

A. General: UL listed, with minimum 175-psig nonshock working-pressure rating or

as required by local code and authority having jurisdiction. Valves for

15300-8

grooved-end piping may be furnished with grooved ends instead of type of ends specified.

B. Provide Supervisory Tamper switches on all control valves. Wiring to alarm panel

is under other sections of the work.

C. Control valves of O.S. & Y. pattern gate valves with equalizing bypass for valves 6" and larger in size.

2.07 WATER-FLOW INDICATOR

A. Provide where indicated, Potter Electric Switch Company, or other approved Type

VSR-D Detector with flexible vane and retarding device to prevent false alarms from line surges.

B. Wiring to fire alarm system will be provided by the Electrical Trade.

2.08 SPRINKLER DRAINS AND TEST CONNECTION

A. Provide all necessary drain valves, drain risers, capped nipples, auxiliary piping,

etc., as required to drain the system risers and mains and all trapped portions of the system. Drain valves which are not connected to drain pipes leading to floor drains shall be hose end type.

B. Main drains and test connections shall be piped to the exterior of the building.

C. Provide all piping required to spill the drains and test connections to the floor,

funnel or other drainage connections provided under the Plumbing Contract, or arrange with the Plumbing Trade to provide additional drainage facilities, in which case pay all charges related to the additional Plumbing Construction work.

D. Provide Inspectors Test connections in accordance with NFPA 13, and as required

by Local Fire Department or authorities having jurisdiction. Pipe to exterior of the building and include sight connection as necessary.

2.09 SPRINKLERS

A. Provide approved automatic sprinklers of Victaulic Co., or other approved

manufacturer.

B. Sprinkler locations, type and finish as scheduled on the drawings.

C. All sprinklers shall be of the proper temperature rating for the locations in which they are installed.

D. Provide sprinkler guards where sprinklers are located 7'-0" AFF or where

sprinklers are subject to damage.

E. Provide stock of extra sprinklers, sprinkler wrenches in accordance with NFPA 13. Cabinets shall be Victaulic or other approved.

15300-9

2.10 ALARM BELL

A. Provide ACME or other approved, WSVB electric, weatherproof, underdome vibration alarm gongs. Waterflow alarm bell shall have a diameter of not less than 6 inches and have a factory red finish. Waterflow alarm bell shall be rated for 24 VDC and shall be connected to the building fire alarm system.

2.11 LADDERS

A. Steel ladders to all valves located 7 ft. or as required by local authorities above

finished floor will be provided by others.

B. This Trade shall furnish a location list of all required ladders to the installing trade.

2.12 SPRINKLERS

A. Automatic Sprinklers: With heat-responsive element complying with the following:

1. UL 199.

B. Sprinkler Types and Categories: As noted on the contract drawings.

C. Sprinkler types, features, and options include the following:

1. Concealed ceiling sprinklers, including cover plate.

2. Upright sprinklers.

3. Sidewall, dry-type sprinklers.

D. Sprinkler Finishes: As noted on the contract drawings.

E. Special Coatings: As noted on the contract drawings.

F. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler

mounting applications, unless alternate finish is specified by architect. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified with sprinklers.

1. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat. 2. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, two piece, with 1-inch vertical

adjustment.

3. Ceiling Mounting: Plastic, white finish, one piece, flat.

G. Sprinkler Guards: Wire-cage type, including fastening device for attaching to sprinkler. Guards shall be UL listed for use with the specific sprinkler (manufacturer and model) to be protected. Guards shall be provided on sprinklers located less than 7 feet above the finished floor and where specifically noted on the drawings.

15300-10

2.13 SPECIALTY SPRINKLER FITTINGS

A. Specialty Fittings: UL listed; made of steel, ductile iron, or other materials compatible with piping.

B. Not used.

C. Locking-Lug Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron body with locking-lug ends.

D. Mechanical-T Fittings: Not permitted.

E. Mechanical-Cross Fittings: Not permitted.

F. Drop-Nipple Fittings: UL 1474, with threaded inlet, threaded outlet, and seals;

adjustable.

G. Sprinkler, Drain and Alarm Test Fittings: UL-listed, cast- or ductile-iron body; with threaded inlet and outlet, test valve, and orifice and sight glass.

H. Sprinkler, Branch-Line Test Fittings: UL-listed, brass body; with threaded inlet

and capped drain outlet and threaded outlet for sprinkler.

I. Sprinkler, Inspector's Test Fittings: UL-listed, cast- or ductile-iron housing; with threaded inlet and drain outlet and sight glass.

2.14 ALARM DEVICES

A. General: Provide types matching piping and equipment connections.

B. Water-Flow Indicators: UL 346; electrical-supervision, vane-type water-flow

detector; with 250-psig pressure rating; and designed for horizontal or vertical installation. Include two single-pole, double-throw, circuit switches for isolated alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete with factory-set, field-adjustable retard element to prevent false signals and tamperproof cover that sends signal if removed.

C. Valve Supervisory Switches: UL 753; electrical; single-pole, double throw; with

normally closed contacts. Include design that signals controlled valve is in other than fully open position.

D. Indicator-Post Supervisory Switches: UL 753; electrical; single-pole, double

throw, with normally closed contacts. Include design that signals controlled indicator-post valve is in other than fully open position.

2.15 PRESSURE GAUGES

A. Pressure Gauges: UL 393, 3-1/2- to 4-1/2-inch- diameter dial with dial range of 0

to 300 psig, or to two times (2x) the working pressure, whichever is greater.

15300-11

2.16 AUTOMATIC AIR VENT

A. Furnish and install air release valve(s) at the high point(s) on the fire sprinkler system piping determined by the sprinkler system designer or engineer to assure evacuation of air from the system during and after filling. The automatic air release valve shall consist of a 40 mesh “Y” type strainer connected to an automatic air vent valve. The output of the air vent valve shall be a ½” NPT male connection which allows a drain attachment for safely draining inadvertent discharge of water that is inherent in the operation of the automatic air vent. Install drain pipe to appropriate location. The air vent assembly shall be field replaceable without disabling the sprinkler system by the installation of a ½” ball valve installed before the Y strainer for isolation purposes. The automatic air release valve shall be mounted in a vertical position and shall require a minimum of 8 ” of clearance above the fire sprinkler main or branch line piping. The Automatic Air Release Valve shall be a model PAV manufactured by Potter Electric Signal Company LLC or approved equal.

2.17 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE

A. Furnish and install a pressure relief trim device above the system check valve. a. Standard: UL’s “Fire Protection Equipment Directory” listing or “Approval

Guide,” published by FM Global, listing. b. Pressure Rating: Factory set at 175 psi or 10 psi in excess of the maximum

system pressure, whichever is greater. c. Body Material: Bronze body and stainless steel spring. d. Components: External identification plate and integral flushing handle to

remove debris. e. ½ inch MIPT inlet, ½ inch FIPT outlet f. Relief pressure shall be factory set to project specifications. g. Relief valve shall operate to the OPEN position between 90% and 105% of the

set pressure. h. Relief valve shall reseat or CLOSE at a maximum of 80% of set pressure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use results for system design calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article in Part 1 of this Section.

B. Report test results promptly and in writing.

3.02 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Do not use welded joints with galvanized steel pipe.

15300-12

B. Flanges, unions, and transition and special fittings with pressure ratings the same as or higher than system's pressure rating may be used in aboveground applications, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Underground Service-Entrance Piping:

1. Use ductile-iron, push-on-joint pipe and fittings and restrained joints.

2. Use ductile-iron, mechanical-joint pipe and fittings and restrained joints.

D. Aboveground Sprinkler Piping: Use the following:

1. NPS 2 and Smaller:

a. Steel pipe shall be black, schedule 40 and shall conform to the

applicable provisions of ASTM A53. Pipe shall have threaded ends, with malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints. Malleable iron fittings shall conform to ASME B16.3.

2. NPS 2-1/2 and larger:

a. Steel pipe shall be black, schedule 40 and shall conform to the

applicable provisions of ASTM A53. Pipe shall have threaded ends, with malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints. Malleable iron fittings shall conform to ASME B16.3.

b. Steel pipe shall be black, schedule 40 and shall conform to the

applicable provisions of ASTM A53 with grooved ends; steel, grooved-end fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and grooved joints.

3.03 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not

indicated, the following requirements apply:

1. Fire-Protection-Service Valves: UL listed for applications where required by NFPA 13.

a. Shutoff Duty: Use gate valves.

2. General-Duty Valves: For applications where UL listed valves are not

required by NFPA 13.

a. Shutoff Duty: Use gate, ball, or butterfly valves.

b. Throttling Duty: Use globe, ball, or butterfly valves.

B. Refer to Part 3.2 of this Section.

15300-13

3.04 JOINT CONSTRUCTION


B. Dissimilar-Piping-Material Joints: Construct joints using adapters or couplings

compatible with both piping materials. Use dielectric fittings if both piping materials are metal.

3.05 SERVICE-ENTRANCE PIPING

A. Connect sprinkler piping to water-service piping of size and in location indicated

for service entrance to building.

B. Install shutoff valve, check valve, pressure gauge, drain, and other accessories at connection to water service.

3.06 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate

general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.

1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written

approval from authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from approved working plans.

B. Install underground service-entrance piping according to Local Code and NFPA 24

and with restrained joints.

C. Use approved fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes.

D. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler piping, complete with shutoff

valve, sized and located according to NFPA 13.

E. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.

F. Install sprinkler zone control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to sprinkler risers when sprinkler branch piping is connected to sprinkler risers.

G. Install alarm devices in piping systems.

H. Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFPA 13 for hanger materials and

installation.

I. Protection of Piping Against Earthquake Damage: Seismically protect the system piping against damage from earthquakes. Install the seismic protection of the system piping in accordance with NFPA 13.

J. Install piping with grooved joints according to manufacturer's written instructions.

15300-14

Construct rigid piping joints, unless otherwise indicated.

K. Install pressure gauges on riser or feed main and at each sprinkler test connection. Include pressure gauges with connection not less than NPS 1/4 and with soft metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gauge and valve. Install gauges to permit removal, and install where they will not be subject to freezing.

3.07 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. For installing general-duty valves. Install fire-protection specialty valves, trim,

fittings, controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13, manufacturer's written instructions, and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Service Control Valves: Install fire-protection-service valves supervised-open,

located to control sources of water supply except from fire department connections. Provide permanent identification signs indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.

C. Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers

instead of check valves in potable-water supply sources.

3.08 SPRINKLER APPLICATIONS

A. General: Use sprinklers according to the following applications, or as directed by the Architect.

1. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers, as indicated.

2. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Pendent concealed sprinklers, as

indicated.

3. Sprinkler Finishes: Use sprinklers with the following finishes or as directed by the Architect.

a. Upright, Pendent, and Sidewall Sprinklers: Chrome-plated in

finished spaces exposed to view; rough bronze in unfinished spaces not exposed to view; nickel teflon where exposed to acids, chemicals, or other corrosive fumes.

b. Concealed Sprinklers: Rough brass, with factory-painted white

cover plate; Color by Architect.

3.09 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION

A. Sprinklers: Space, locate, and position sprinklers in accordance with the reflected ceiling plans and the design criteria.

1. The sprinklers in all areas are to be installed on a true axis line in both

directions with a maximum deviation from the axis line of ½" plus or minus from architects reflected ceiling plans. At the completion of the installation, if any sprinklers are found to exceed the above mentioned

15300-15

tolerance, same shall be removed and reinstalled by this Contractor.

2. Install sprinklers in center of tiles.

3. Provide all sprinklers and work in strict conformance with approved shop drawings. The Architect reserves the right to reject any and all work not in accordance with the approved shop drawing.

4. Perform the following in areas where painting occurs or when sprinkler

piping is painted. As soon as sprinklers are in place, the Contractor shall cover each sprinkler with a small bag of an Underwriter's approved type, which shall be removed only after all painting is complete. After the bag is removed, all sprinklers shall be cleaned and polished.

5. Do not install pendant or sidewall, wet-type sprinklers in areas subject to

freezing. Use dry type sprinklers. Locate water supply within heated space.

3.10 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect water supplies to sprinklers. Include backflow preventers.

B. Connect piping to specialty valves, specialties, and accessories.

C. Electrical Connections: Power wiring is specified in Division 26.

D. Connect alarm devices to fire alarm.

3.11 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements of the Authority having Jurisdiction, NFPA 13

B. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to

requirements as required by the Authority having Jurisdiction, NFPA 13

3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler piping according to the Authority having Jurisdiction, NFPA 13,

B. Replace piping system components that do not pass test procedures and retest to

demonstrate compliance. Repeat procedure until satisfactory results are obtained.

C. Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction.

15300-16

3.13 CLEANING

A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.

B. Remove and replace sprinklers having paint other than factory finish.

3.14 PROTECTION

A. Protect sprinklers from damage until Substantial Completion.

3.15 COMMISSIONING

A. Verify that specialty valves, trim, fittings, controls, and accessories are installed and

B. Verify that specified tests of piping are complete.

C. Verify that damaged sprinklers and sprinklers with paint or coating not specified

are replaced with new, correct type.

D. Verify that sprinklers are correct types, have correct finishes and temperature ratings, and have guards as required for each application.

E. Verify that potable-water supplies have correct types of backflow preventers.

F. Fill wet-pipe sprinkler piping with water.

G. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.

H. Adjust operating controls and pressure settings.

I. Coordinate with fire alarm tests. Operate as required.

3.19 DEMONSTRATION

A. Demonstrate equipment, specialties, and accessories. Review operating and

maintenance information.

B. Schedule demonstration with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice.

END OF SECTION

15400-1

SECTION 15400

PLUMBING SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. The following described work, materials and equipment shall be furnished and installed as shown on the Drawings and as herein specified.

1. All plumbing fixtures, accessories and trims as shown on the Drawings and

as herein specified. 2. Domestic water service, specialties and piping to all fixtures and equipment. 3. All sanitary sewer piping and equipment shown throughout the building and

extension of the sanitary sewer to the septic tank. 1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Section 15200 - HVAC General Provisions B. Section 15140 - Supports and Anchors C. Section 15160 - Through Penetration Fire Stopping D. Section 15195 - Plumbing Identification E. Section 15264 - Insulation for Plumbing Systems F. Section 15410 - Plumbing System Valves

1.03 REFERENCES

A. All plumbing installation and fabrication shall be in accordance with applicable State and Local Plumbing Codes.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit catalog data and shop drawings for all materials and equipment listed under this section and per basic mechanical requirements. Include submittal data on related specifications also.

B. Materials, fixtures, or equipment installed without review or after rejection shall be

replaced by this contractor with acceptable items at the Engineer's direction. C. All materials, equipment, and appliances shall be new, without defect, first line

quality unless specifically noted or specified otherwise.

15400-2

D. The supplier, by submitting, certifies the materials and equipment to be satisfactory for the application involved.

E. Submit line drawings for review on all piping and equipment to be installed. F. Contractor further agrees that if deviations, discrepancies or conflicts between

submittals and specifications are discovered either prior to or after submittals are processed by the engineer, the design drawings and specifications shall control and be followed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PLUMBING FIXTURES

A. General: Provide all plumbing fixtures complete with trim required, and connect in a manner conforming to the local Building Code. Certain fixtures may be furnished by others under other sections of these Specifications. Provide rough-in and final connections including all valves, traps, specialties, etc. required.

B. Provide traps for all waste connections where not furnished with the equipment and

stop cocks or valved shut-offs for all water connections to all sinks and other items of equipment. All exposed pipe and metal, including that within cabinets, shall be chrome plated.

C. Faucets, trim, eyewashes and emergency showers furnished to Division 15 contractor

by Division 11 contractor for installation by Division 15 contractor D. Quality and Type of Fixtures:

1. Most of the plumbing fixtures are specified by American-Standard catalog

numbers; however, the purpose is to establish quality and type only. Where American-Standard fixtures are specified, fixtures of equal quality and type as manufactured by Crane or Kohler, will be acceptable.

2. Carriers are specified by Wade catalog numbers to establish quality, type and

supporting capacities only. Carriers of equal quality, type and supporting capacities as manufactured by Zurn or Josam will be acceptable.

E. Fixture Schedule:

1. P1 - Water Closet, Floor Set, Flush Valve: American-Standard No. 2857.128,

"Madera"; white, vitreous china, elongated bowl, 16-1/2” rim, 1-1/2" top spud, siphon jet, 1.28 gallons per flush.

15400-3

Trim: American Standard 6047.121.002 flush valve, 1.28 gallons per flush, cast wall flange or equal by Zurn or Delany. Seat: American Standard 5901.100, white, open front seat without cover, stainless steel post, self-sustaining and external check hinge, equal by Beneke or Bemis.

2. P2- Lavatory, Wall-hung, Handicapped: American-Standard No. 0321.026, ”Declyn”; white vitreous china finish, self-rimming, rear overflow, 18-1/2”x17", faucet holes on 4" centers.

Trim: American Standard 5502.175, widespread handles, chrome finish, 3 hole application, 4" centers, 0.5 gpm spray outlet, 1/2" IPS male threaded inlet shanks, perforated metal grid strainer. Provide angle valves [with loose key], escutcheons for supplies, 17 gauge P-trap with cleanout and deep box escutcheon for waste, all shall have a chrome plated finish as manufactured by Engineered Brass Company (EBS) or McGuire Mfg. Co. Insulate supplies and waste per specification 15264. Insulation is not required where counter encloses waste and supplies.

3. Combination Emergency Shower/Eye Wash: Haws Model 8346; deluge

shower with ABS plastic shower head, instant-action stay-open chrome plated brass ball valve type shower valve with rigid stainless steel push-pull rod, Buna N covered ABS plastic anti-surge eye-wash heads, circular chrome plated face-wash spray ring, stainless steel bowl, constant flow pressure compensator, instant-action stay-open brass ball valve type eye/face-wash valve with foot-treadle or push-flag operator, 1-1/4" galvanized pipe standard with 9" floor flange, 1-1/4" supply, 1-1/4" waste, 86" shower height, 45" eye/face-wash height. Flow switch shall be installed and shall initiate an alarm signal.

2.02 ELECTRIC INSTANTANEOUS WATER HEATER (IWH-1)

A. General: IWH-1 shall be U.L. Listed. B. IWH-1 Eemax Model SP55 with 208VAC and 22.9 amps, 5,500 watts or approved

equal. C. Flow Control: Solid brass housing, 0.5 gpm flow control shall be placed on the

outlet side of the water heater. Provide 0.5 gpm aerator if not installed with sink or lavatory.

15400-4

2.03 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM

A. Buried, Exterior:

1. Copper Pipe, 3 1/2" and smaller: Type K hard drawn copper per ASTM B-88. Fittings: Wrought copper or cast brass. Joints: Lead free, tin-silver solder.

2. Ductile Iron Pipe (D.I.P.), 4" and larger: Cement lined, per ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51.

Joints: Shall be push on or mechanical type as indicated on drawings.

B. Buried Below Slab:

1. Copper Pipe, 2" and smaller: Type K soft drawn copper per ASTM B-88

terminate 12" AFF. Fittings and joints shall not be permitted below slab. 2. Copper Pipe, 2-1/2" and larger: Type K hard drawn copper per ASTM B-88.

Fittings: Wrought copper or cast brass. Joints: All joints below slab shall be hard temper with brazed joints.

C. Above Grade:

1. Copper Pipe: Type L hard drawn copper per ASTM B-88. Fittings:

Wrought copper or cast brass. Joints: Lead-free, tin-silver solder.

Note: Mechanically formed TEE connections will be allowed on hard drawn copper only. Joints must be brazed in accordance with the copper development association copper tube handbook using B-cup series filler metal, and manufacturing recommendations.

D. All solder joints shall be soldered with an approved, lead free, tin-silver solder. Acid core solder shall not be used.

E. Above Grade (Chemical Area):

1. CPVC Pipe: Pipe and fittings shall be manufactured from virgin CPVC

(chlorinated polyvinyl chloride) vinyl compounds with a cell class of 24448 as identified in ASTM D-1784. All pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM D-2846 and National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) Standards 14 and 61. Buried pipe shall be installed in accordance with ASTM F-1668. Solvent cement joints shall be made using CPVC cement conforming to ASTM F-493

2.04 DOMESTIC WATER SPECIALTIES

15400-5

A. Water Hammer Arrestors (SA): ANSI A112.26.1; sized in accordance with PDI

WH-201, precharged suitable for operation in temperature range -100 to 300 degrees F and maximum 250 psig working pressure; Model Z-1700 manufactured by Zurn; Josam, Wade or equal.

B. Trap Primers: (TP-1) ANSI/ASSE 1018; bronze body, integral vacuum breaker,

replaceable valve seat, bronze access cover with gasket; Model Z-1022 manufactured by Zurn; Josam, Wade or equal.

C. Electronic Trap Primers: (ETP) To be Zurn or approved equal, brass ball stop valve

with slow closing 24 VAC solenoid valve and strainer. Model Z1020. Shall have manifold with five outlet connections. Locate where shown on plans. Install per manufacturer’s recommendations.

D. Thermostatic Mixing Valves: Thermostatic controller with swivel action check

stops, removable cartridge with strainer, stainless steel piston, liquid filled thermal motor, bellows mounted out of water, volume control shutoff valve, 3" bimetallic dial thermometer (20-240 F), brass pipe, fittings and unions to cabinet limits, all interior parts with rough chrome finish, semi-recessed cabinet with top inlets and outlet, 16 gauge cabinet, 12 gauge door with hinge and cylinder lock, baked white enamel finish; Symmons "TempControl", Model 5-500B-S-TOP or equal.

E. Yard Hydrant (Freeze Proof Hydrant): (FPH) non-freeze, self-draining type with

scoriated brass door, locking capability, loose key, 3/4" hose thread spout with vacuum breaker-backflow preventer, 1/8" NPT tapped drain hole, 2'-0" minimum burial depth; Woodford Model Y34 or equal by J. R. Smith.

F. Pressure Regulator: (PRV) ASSE 1003 Bronze body with bronze, stainless steel, and

plastic trim; 80 GPM min. at 10 psi fall off pressure, field set at 65 psi, separate strainer with stainless steel strainer screen; Watts Regulator, N223-S-HP, or equal.

G. Gauge Cocks shall be polished brass valves with 1/4" NPT female connections and

handles. Valves shall be suitable for 125 psi. Acceptable Manufacturers: Trerice No. 865 or equal by Marsh.

H. Pressure gauges shall have phosphor bronze bourdon tube and phosphor bronze or

stainless steel movement. The gauge case shall be stainless steel. Windows shall be glass or acrylic plastic. Gauges shall have 3-1/2" dials with white faces and black graduations. Scales shall have a minimum arc of 260 degrees. Gauges shall be accurate to within 1% of the full scale reading over at least the middle half of the span. The accuracy over the remainder of the scale shall not exceed 2%. Gauge ranges shall be selected so that the normal operating point is approximately mid-scale. Scales shall indicate psi. All gauges shall be provided with a pulsation damper, snubber, restrictor or similar device to dampen pulsation surges (use of the

15400-6

gauge cock for this purpose is not acceptable). Gauges shall have 1/4" NPT bottom outlets. Equal to Trerice No. 600C or equivalent of Marsh.

I. Thermometers shall be adjustable angle type with separable matching socket.

Thermometers shall have cast aluminum cases with baked enamel finish, red reading mercury tubes with black scale graduations, and glass or acrylic plastic covers. Scales shall be a minimum of 9 inches with appropriate ranges for indicating temperatures at least 25% above and below normal readings. Sockets shall have stem length suitable for pipe receiving thermometer. Sockets and stems shall be brass. Sockets on insulated pipes shall have lagging extensions of adequate length to clear insulation. Equal to Trerice No. A007 or equal by Marsh.

2.05 SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM INSULATION

A. All sanitary piping exposed shall be insulated. Exposed floor drain bodies and P-traps shall be insulated.

B. Insulation shall be 1" thick, jacketed fiberglass. See Section 15264 for additional

information. 2.06 SANITARY SEWER PIPING SYSTEM

Note: This contractor shall provide/install cast iron pipe at all fire rated assemblies and return air plenums. This contractor shall coordinate with architectural and mechanical drawings.

A. Buried, Exterior:

1. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A-74 spun service weight. Fittings: Cast iron.

Joints: Hub-and-spigot, CISPI HSN compression type with ASTM C-564 neoprene gaskets.

2. PVC Pipe: Schedule 40 per ASTM D-1785. Fittings: PVC per ASTM

D-2466. Joints: Solvent weld per ASTM D-2855 with solvent per ASTM D-2564.

B. Buried, Below Slab:

1. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A-74 spun service weight. Fittings: Cast iron.


2. PVC Pipe: Schedule 40 per ASTM D-1785. Fittings: PVC per ASTM


15400-7

C. Above Grade:

1. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A-74, spun service weight. Fittings: Cast iron.


2. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, spun service weight. Fittings: Cast iron.

Joints: Neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies. 3. PVC Pipe: Schedule 40 per ASTM D-1785. Fittings: PVC per ASTM


2.07 SANITARY SEWER SPECIALTIES

A. Cleanouts: Provide cleanouts as specified herein, as required to comply with applicable Codes and as indicated on the Drawings. Cleanouts in floors shall be cast iron, push-on type with neoprene gaskets, threaded, adjustable height heads and bronze plugs unless noted otherwise. Cleanouts shall be the same nominal size as the pipe served up to 4" and not less than 4" for line sizes greater than 4". Zurn cleanouts have been specified, however, cleanouts of equal quality as manufactured by Josam, Wade, or J. R. Smith will be acceptable.

1. Cleanouts in unfinished floors shall have round, scoriated, heavy duty, nickel

bronze tops; Zurn No. Z-1400-HD. 2. Cleanouts in carpeted floors shall have round, heavy duty, nickel bronze tops

with carpet retainer; Zurn No. Z-1400-CM. 3. Cleanouts in other finished floors shall have round, scoriated, heavy duty,

nickel bronze tops; Zurn No. Z-1400-2. 4. Cleanouts in walls for cast iron piping shall be cast iron ferrules with no-hub

joints, cadmium plated cast iron counter sunk plugs and round stainless steel access cover with securing screw; Zurn No. Z-1440.

5. Cleanouts in walls shall have cast iron countersunk plugs and round

stainless steel access cover with securing screw; Zurn No. Z-1441. 6. Exterior cleanouts in traffic areas Zurn No. 1400-HD.

B. Floor Drains: Provide floor drains as specified herein and as indicated on the

Drawings. Floor drains shall be cast iron, push-on type with neoprene gaskets unless noted otherwise. Zurn floor drains have been specified, however, floor drains of

15400-8

equal quality as manufactured by Josam, Wade or J. R. Smith will be acceptable.

1. FD-1: ANSI A112.21.1; galvanized cast iron two piece body with double drainage flange, weep holes, adjustable round nickel bronze strainer; Zurn Model Z-415 with Type B Strainer.

2. FD-2: Coated cast iron body with bottom outlet, medium duty 9" diameter

cast iron slotted grate Zurn Model Z-550. 2.08 P & T RELIEF PIPING

A. Above Slab:

1. Copper Pipe: Type M hard drawn copper per ASTM B-88. Fittings: Wrought copper or cast brass. Joints: Lead-free, tin-silver solder.


A. Obtain exact centerline rough-in dimensions between partitions or walls from the Architectural Drawings. Work shall be roughed-in so that all exposed piping will be straight and true without bends or off-sets. Water supplies shall connect through walls with stops and chrome plated escutcheons with set screws. Where fixtures are without supporting legs or carriers secure wall hangers to bolts welded to 3/16" steel plates, mounted against walls within chases.

B. Where backs of fixtures join wainscotting or tile, they shall be ground flat and the

joints made close. Run bead of white caulking compound around back of fixture at outside edge before final setting. When fixture is set, wipe compound so that joint is sealed. Remove excess compound with solvent. Caulking compound shall be Porter "Brilliant White", Pittsburgh Glass, Sherwin-Williams, or equal.

C. All rough-in sanitary sewer piping shall be properly plugged or capped in a manner

approved by the Engineer. D. Mount fixtures to the following heights above finished floor, unless noted otherwise

on the architectural drawings.

Water Closet: Standard 15 inches to rim of bowl

Handicapped 18 inches to rim of bowl

15400-9

Lavatory: Child 27 inches to rim of bowl

Standard 34 inches to rim of bowl Handicapped 34 inches to rim of bowl

and 27" minimum knee clearance

E. Provide trap primers for all floor drains, floor sinks and open receptacle traps. All trap primers shall be accessible for inspection and/or replacement, provide access panels as required. Coordinate open receptacles with HVAC contractor.

F. Insulate exposed supplies, waste, and P-trap on all lavatories per Specification 15264. G. Provide copper-plated bracket with holes as required to hold all supplies at all

fixtures, brackets similar to Holdrite or approved equal. 3.02 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM

A. Provide a complete system of domestic water piping including interior and exterior work as indicated.

B. Piping shall be accurately cut to measurements established at the project site, worked

into place without springing or forcing, run as directly as possible, run parallel or perpendicular to building lines, located as indicated on the Drawings and supported as specified elsewhere. Parallel piping shall be grouped together as much as practical. Piping shall be supported as high as practical. Piping not located in mechanical rooms shall be concealed unless noted otherwise.

C. Piping shall be run as directly as possible, avoiding all unnecessary fittings and

joints. Changes in routing of piping due to field conditions shall be at the expense of this Contractor.

D. Contractor shall provide for expansion and contraction of piping systems. Expansion

and contraction of piping shall not impart excess stress or strain on the building, pipe fittings, joints or connections to equipment.

E. Piping shall be installed with sufficient spacing between fittings, valves, flanges, etc.

so as to allow insulation fittings to be installed without trimming or modification. F. Provide sleeves for all piping penetrations of grade beams, floors above grade and

walls. Sleeves for insulation piping above grade shall be sized for the insulation diameter. Sleeves for piping through walls below grade shall be sized for use of compressible rubber link seals unless noted otherwise.

G. Piping thru slabs on grade shall be protected with 1/2" thick closed cell flexible foam

insulation minimum 6 inches above and below slab. Wrap or coat all pipe layed in

15400-10

gravel or in contact with concrete. H. Provide escutcheon plates at each exposed piping penetration of walls and ceilings.

Escutcheon plates for insulated piping shall be sized for the insulation diameter. I. All piping shall be installed to allow complete draining, slope as required. Provide

drain valves at all low points where fixtures cannot be used to drain piping. Provide hose bibb with 3/4" hose connection and vacuum breaker/backflow preventer at water main entrance.

J. Provide shutoff valves at each branch from main. Provide shutoff valves for each

fixture group to minimize interruption of service for maintenance and repair. Provide an exterior main shutoff valve and valve box as indicated on drawings.

K. Piping thru metal studs shall be isolated from metal to metal contact with plastic

bushings specifically designed for the application. L. Provide water hammer arrestors for each fixture group as indicated. Capacity of each

water hammer arrestor shall meet or exceed the total fixture units of each fixture group. All water hammer arrestors shall be accessible for inspection and/or replacement, provide access panels as required.

M. All stubouts and exposed piping shall be rigidly supported to eliminate movement. N. This Contractor shall complete all equipment connections to the domestic water

piping system. Provide shutoff valves and unions for each connection. O. Connections to water heaters and connections between ferrous and copper pipe shall

be made with dielectric unions or flanges. Joints between plastic and metallic pipe shall be made with transition fittings for the specified purpose.

P. Exterior water line shall have a minimum of 24" cover.

3.03 HOT WATER TEMPERATURE MAINTENANCE SYSTEM

A. Install self-regulating heater and components on domestic hot water supply piping per the manufacturer's recommendations, as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.

B. All piping shall be tested in accordance with "TESTING" before being traced. C. Secure heater to piping with high temperature fiberglass

tape to prevent sagging and slipping of heater. D. Test heater resistance before installation of thermal insulation. Test resistance with a

15400-11

1000 VDC megger. Minimum insulation resistance shall be between 20 and 1000 megohms regardless of length. Contact Architect and heater manufacturer if limits are exceeded.

E. Install "ELECTRIC TRACED" labels at each side of each wall penetration and

maximum 8' O.C. following installation of thermal insulation. F. Coordinate power requirements and point of service with the Electrical Contractor.

Final power connection shall be by the Electrical Contractor. 3.04 SANITARY SEWER PIPING SYSTEM

A. Provide a complete system of sanitary sewer drain, waste and vent piping including interior and exterior work as indicated.

B. Piping 6" and smaller shall be sloped at least 1/8 inch per foot. Piping buried below

slab shall be sloped a minimum of 1/8" inch per foot. Piping 8" and larger shall be sloped at least 1/16 inch per foot.

C. Buried piping below slab and exterior of building perimeter shall be laid in minimum

4 inches of bedding below and 6" above pipe, and sloped as specified herein. Bedding shall be accurately and uniformly graded. Bedding shall be crushed stone equal to Alabama Highway Department #9 crushed stone. Bedding shall be free of organic material. Backfill below floor slabs shall be No. 57 crushed stone full depth from top of bedding to bottom of slab.

D. Provide cleanouts as required by Code and as indicated on the Drawings. Cleanouts

for piping 4" and smaller shall be line size. Cleanouts for piping 6" and larger shall be 4". Provide dual exterior cleanouts within 5 feet of building. Interior cleanouts in floors shall be flush with finished floors. Interior cleanouts in walls shall be above the flood level of plumbing fixtures. Exterior cleanouts in unpaved areas and areas paved with other than concrete shall be set flush in 15" x 15" x 6" concrete pads flush with finished grade.

E. Vents through roof shall be a minimum of 3 inches in diameter and shall terminate at

least 12 inches above the roof. See plans for other sizes. F. This Contractor shall be responsible for locating vents at least 10 feet from Outside

Air intakes, offset vents as required. G. Drainage piping shall be installed with hubs upstream of each pipe section. Provide

reducing fittings where different sizes of pipe are to be connected, bushings shall not be used. Provide longsweep fittings, sanitary tees and combination wyes with 1/8 bends as applicable.

15400-12

H. All rough-in soil, waste, vent and storm piping shall be properly plugged or capped in a manner approved by the Engineer.

3.05 TESTING

A. All piping shall be tested before being insulated or concealed in any manner. Where leaks or defects develop, required corrections shall be made and tests repeated until systems are proven satisfactory.

B. Water piping systems shall be subjected to a hydrostatic test of one hundred twenty

five pounds minimum or 1 1/2 times operating pressure which ever is greater. The system shall be proven tight after a twenty-four (24) hour test.

C. All rainleaders, soil waste and vent piping shall be subjected to a hydrostatic test of

not less than a 10-foot head or an air test of not less than 5 pounds per square inch using a mercury column gauge. Piping shall be tested for not less than 4 hours, prior to installing fixtures. Underground piping shall be tested before backfilling.

D. After fixtures have been installed, the entire plumbing system, exclusive of the house

sewer shall be subjected to an air pressure test equal to one inch water column and proven tight. The Contractor shall furnish and install all of the test tees required, including those for isolating any portion of the system for tests.

E. Provide test report in booklet form showing all field tests performed to prove

compliance with the specified performance criteria. Booklet shall be submitted prior to submitting for final payment. Booklet shall include the following

a. SYSTEM TESTED (sanitary) (domestic water) (rain leaders) b. Date of test c. Test medium d. Persons present e. Pressure tested f. Lines tested g. Length of time test pressure was held h. Pressure drop i. Water pressure at most remote and highest location j. residual chlorine

F. This Contractor shall conduct all specified tests until approved by the Engineer. All

tests shall be repeated until approved by the Engineer. Piping systems shall not be covered or otherwise concealed until tests inspections have been made and approvals obtained. This Contractor shall notify the Engineer four days prior to testing to allow for scheduling.

G. All reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers (RPBP) and Double Check Backflow

15400-13

Preventers (DCBP) shall be tested by City Utilities or someone certified to test such devices and certificate shall be submitted indicating devices that passed tests.

3.06 STERILIZATION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM

A. Thoroughly flush for a minimum of two hours and then drain the domestic water piping prior to sterilizing by the following method or other methods satisfactory to the Engineer and the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

B. Refer to specification section 15041 for disinfection of piping and structures. C. The Engineer reserves the right to test the water again at any time prior to final

acceptance of the work and if found to be unsafe bacteriologically, to require the Contractor to rechlorinate the system until the water is proven equal to that supplied by the public system.

D. Contractor shall arrange for laboratory testing for a bacteriological examination of

potable water system at various locations. The samples shall be tested to meet requirement of city and shall not be of less quality than provided by city. Submit copy from testing agency prior to submitting for final payment.

E. Minor work such as repairs or replacement of single fitting or valve, pre-clean and

disinfect by immersion in solution of 300 ppm chlorine for 1 hour. 3.07 CLEANING

A. At completion of all work, fixtures, exposed materials and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned.

B. All strainer screens, shall be removed and cleaned.

3.08 FINAL ACCEPTANCE

Before final acceptance, the Plumbing Contractor shall furnish a certificate of inspection and final approval from the plumbing Inspector to the Owner and be in accordance with the latest revisions of the applicable codes and the Approved Plumbing Drawings and Specifications. Contractor shall also furnish booklet of test, sterilization compliance and backflow devices certificates.

END OF SECTION

15410-1

SECTION 15410

PLUMBING SYSTEM VALVES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required and install complete and ready for operation all valves and appurtenances as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

B. The valves included are:

1. Gate valves 2. Globe or angle valves 3. Ball valves 4. Check valves 5. Strainers 6. Gas Cocks 7. Lubricated Plug valves 8. Circuit setters 9. Drain valves 10. Backflow preventers

1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

All of the materials specified herein is intended to be standard for use in controlling the flow of water, gases, or air, depending on the applications.


All of the types of valves shall be products of well established firms who are fully experienced, reputable and qualified in the manufacture of the particular product to be furnished. All materials of construction shall be of an acceptable type and shall be designated for the pressure and temperatures at which they are to be operated, for the materials they are to handle and for the use for which they are intended. The materials shall meet established technical standards of quality and strength necessary to assure safe installations and conform to applicable standards. The equipment shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practices and methods and shall comply with these Specifications as applicable.

15410-2

1.04 REFERENCES

A. Standard Building Code B. Standard Plumbing Code

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Copies of all materials required to establish compliance with these Specifications

shall be submitted. Submittals shall include at least the following: 1. Certified drawings showing all important details of construction and

dimensions. 2. Descriptive literature, bulletins, and/or catalogs cut sheets. 3. The total weight of each item. 4. A list of the manufacturer's recommended spare parts with one set to be

turned over to the owner at final acceptance. 5. Manufacturer’s standard warranty (two year minimum) for all materials

provided. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Where a manufacturer is referenced, equivalent valves by Homestead, Lunkenheimer, Milwaukee, or Stockham will be acceptable.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. General

1. All valves and appurtenances shall be of the size shown on the Drawings and as far as possible, all valves shall be from one manufacturer.

2. All valves and appurtenances shall have the name of the maker, flow directional arrows, and the working pressure for which they are designed cast in raised letters upon some appropriate part of the body.

2.03 VALVE CONNECTIONS

A. Provide valves suitable to connect to adjoining piping as specified for pipe joints. Use pipe size valves.

B. Solder pipe sizes 2 inches and smaller.

15410-3

C. Flange pipe sizes 2-1/2 inches and larger. D. Solder or screw to solder adapters for copper tubing as required. E. All water system valves shall be lead free.

2.04 GATE VALVES

Sizes 2" and smaller shall be Nibco Figure No.S-113, bronze solder ends, solid wedge disc, taper seat rising brass stem, working steam pressure 125 psi, WOG 200 psi. Sizes 2-1/2" and larger shall be Nibco Figure No.F-619; iron body bronze mounted, flanged with flanged bonnet, brass stem, cast iron wedge, working steam pressure 125 psi.

2.05 GLOBE VALVES

Sizes 2" and smaller shall be Nibco Figure No. S-211-Y; bronze, solder ends, renewable bronze disc, brass stem, working steam pressure 125 psi. Sizes 2-1/2" and larger shall be Nibco Figure No. F-718-B; flanged with flanged bonnet and yoke, rising bronze stem, brass seat and disc, working steam pressure 125 psi.

2.06 BALL VALVES

Sizes 2" and smaller shall be Nibco Figure No. S-585-70-66; Bronze case; stainless steel ball & stem; TFE seats; packing and gaskets, 150 psi working steam pressure. Sizes 2-1/2" and larger shall require gate valves.

2.07 CHECK VALVES (Swing Type)

Sizes 2" and smaller shall be Nibco Figure No. S-413-W; bronze, solder ends with screwed cap, swing check, renewable bronze disc, working steam pressure 125 psi. Sizes 2-1/2" and larger shall be Nibco Figure No. F-918; swing check, flanged with bolted bonnet, renewable bronze seat and disc, working steam pressure 125 psi.

2.08 CHECK VALVES (Spring Actuated Type)

Sizes 2" and smaller shall be Nibco Figure No. S-480-W; spring actuated check, bronze, solder ends with screwed cap, stainless steel spring, renewable bronze disc and seat, working steam pressure 125 psi.

15410-4

Sizes 2-1/2" and larger shall be Nibco Figure No. F-910; spring actuated check, flanged with bolted bonnet, stainless steel spring, renewable bronze seat and disc, working steam pressure 125 psi.

2.09 STRAINERS

Sizes 2" and smaller shall be Watts No. S777M1; "Y" type, bronze body, solder ends, #20 mesh stainless steel strainer screen, provide closure plug as required, working steam pressure 125 psi. Sizes 2-1/2" and larger shall be Watts No. 77F-ZD-FDA; "Y" type, cast iron body, flanged, #20 mesh stainless steel strainer screen, working steam pressure 125 psi.

2.10 GAS COCKS

Bronze body and plug, screwed ends, Lunkenheimer No. 872; 250 psi WOG.

2.11 LUBRICATED PLUG VALVES

Sizes 2" and smaller shall be Homestead Fig. 601, screwed, semi-steel body and cylindrical plug, 100% full port, wrench operated, 200 lb. WOG, 150 lb. SWP, U.L. Listed. Sizes 2-1/2" and larger shall be Homestead Fig. 602, flanged, semi-steel body and cylindrical plug, 100% full port, wrench operated, 200 lb. WOG, 150 lb. SWP, U.L. Listed. Provide locking wrench with each valve.

2.12 CIRCUIT SETTER VALVES

Sizes 1/2" thru 3/4" shall be furnish and install on the interior hot water recirculating water lines, Watts Series CSB-41-S Flow Balancing Valves; bronze body, solder ends, PTFE packing material, brass pressure taps, brass ball All valves shall be satisfactory for applications involving throttling service.

2.13 DRAIN VALVES

Bronze lever cock; nipple and cap or hose thread; Lunkenheimer No. 472, 250 psi working steam pressure.

2.14 BACKFLOW PREVENTER VALVES (RPBP/DCBP/DCDA)

Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers (RPBP); sizes 2" and smaller shall be: ANSI/ASSE

15410-5

1013; bronze or epoxy coated cast iron valve body with bronze and plastic internal parts and stainless steel springs; assembled with two full ported quarter turn ball valves, strainer, all test cocks; and air gap accessory. Watts Regulator Series 909-QT-AG-S domestic cold water use or 909-QT-AG-HW-S rated for hot water use or engineer approved equal. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers (RPBP); sizes 2-1/2" and larger shall be: ANSI/ASSE 1013; FDA epoxy coated cast iron valve body with bronze and plastic internal parts and stainless steel springs; assembled with two non-rising stem resilient wedge gate valves, strainer, all test cocks; and fabricated air gap accessory. Watts Regulator Series 909-NRS-RW-S domestic cold water use or engineer approved equal. Double Check Backflow Preventers (DCBP) sizes 2" and smaller shall be: ANSI/ASSE No. 1015; Bronze or epoxy coated cast iron valve bodies with all bronze, plastic and stainless steel trim; two independently operating, spring loaded check valves; assembled with two full ported ball valves and all test cocks. Watts Regulator, Series 007-QT-S or approved equal. Double Check Backflow Preventers (DCBP) sizes 2-1/2" and larger shall be: ANSI/ASSE No. 1015; epoxy coated cast iron valve bodies with all bronze, plastic and stainless steel trim; two independently operating, spring loaded check valves; assembled with two non-rising stem resilient wedge gate valves and all test cocks. Watts Regulator, Series 709-NRS-RW-S or approved equal. Double Check Detector Assembly (DCDA) sizes 3" and larger shall be: ANSI/ASSE No. 1047, UL/FM approved; FDA epoxy coated cast iron valve bodies with all bronze, plastic and stainless steel trim; two independently operating, spring loaded check valves; assembled with two rising stem resilient wedge gate valves, all test cocks and by-pass line with meter reading in GPM. Watts Regulator, Series 709DCDA-S-OS&Y-RW-GPM or engineer approved equal. All pipe and fittings aboveground shall be brass for BFV assembly.

2.15 VALVE OPERATORS

A. Provide suitable handwheels for gate, globe or angle valves. B. Provide one wrench for every ten plug valves, size 2 inch and smaller, minimum of

one. Provide a wrench with set screw for each plug valve size 2-1/2 inch and larger. C. Provide chain operated sheaves for valves located more than 7 feet above equipment

room floors. Extend chains to 5 feet above floor and hook to clips arranged to clear walking aisles.

15410-6

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. All valves and appurtenances shall be installed in the locations shown, true to alignment and rigidly supported. Any damage to the above items shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER before they are installed.

B. Control valves in all locations shall be so grouped and located that they may be easily

operated, through access panels, doors, or adjacent to equipment. C. Valves shall be the same size as the pipe it is to be installed in. D. Valves 2 inches and smaller shall be solder end. E. Valves 2-1/2 inches and larger shall be flanged. F. Valves shall be installed with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. G. Provide gate or ball valves for shut-off and isolating service, to isolate equipment,

part of systems, or vertical risers as indicated on the drawings. H. Provide globe, or angle valves for throttling service and control device or meter

by-pass. I. Provide spring-loaded check valves on discharge of recirculating pumps and water

booster pumps. J. Provide gas cocks and lubricated plug valves for gas service. K. Provide drain valves at main shut-off valves, and low points of piping and where

fixture cannot be used to drain piping. END OF SECTION

15430-1

SECTION 15430

FUEL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The work covered in this section shall include all labor, materials, equipment and

services necessary to provide and install complete fuel and oil storage and distribution systems as specified herein and as shown on the drawings. The system will include quantity and size of above ground fuel storage tanks as indicated on

the drawings, a complete fuel piping system for each tank and generator, fuel storage tank monitoring system, and all accessories as indicated for each tank and fuel piping system. The system will convey diesel fuel between the generator and the fuel storage tank. The tank, fuel system and all appurtenances shall be furnished and installed under this section.

1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 15192 – Petroleum Piping and Equipment Identification B. Section 16239 – Standby Diesel Generator Sets 1.03 REFERENCES A. Applicable codes and references from the following references shall be followed

and adhered to during the construction of this project. 1. National Fire Protection Association, NFPA30 and 30A 2. Petroleum Equipment Institute 3. American Petroleum Institute 4. All state, local and federal building, fire, electrical and environmental

regulations and codes. 5. All industry safety practices, OSHA standards. 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. The installation of the work described above shall be performed by a contractor

normally engaged in this type of installation and who has a minimum of five years’ experience in this line of work.

B. The installation of the work described above shall be performed by a single

contractor.

15430-2

1.05 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. All work shall conform to the applicable requirements of the City, County, State

and Federal codes. Where the requirements of such agencies are more stringent than specified herein, abide by such requirements and consider this Specification as supplementary to those requirements.

B. The tank systems including coating and sealants must be accepted by the US

Environmental Protection Agency. All work shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following: Federal Register and the Federal Resource Conservation Recovery Act law (RCRA).

C. All work shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following: National

Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 30 - Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code; and NFPA 321 - Basic Classification of Flammable and Combustible Liquid.

C. The tank shall meet the current requirements of Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

Standard 142 and UL 2085, all requirements of the Florida Administrative Code 62-762, and all local requirements. All components of the fuel distribution system shall be UL listed, unless otherwise specified, or approved by the Engineer.

E. The tank and fuel system shall be designed and fabricated according to best

practices and methods available to date. F. Double walled tanks shall be approved and registered by the FDEP in accordance

with Chapter 62-762.851, F.A.C. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawing submittals will be required for all equipment and specialties as

specified in the specification sections listed under 1.02, Related Work. B. All shop drawings being furnished and installed by this contractor shall be

submitted at one time as a complete package. Each copy of shop drawings shall be bound in a three ring binder.

C. All shop drawings shall be checked and noted accordingly by the contractor, before

submitting for approval. D. No equipment shall be ordered or fabricated without formal approval of submitted

shop drawings.

15430-3

1.07 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS A. Contractor shall obtain all permits and inspections necessary for completion of work

as stated in Section 1.01, above, and pay all legally authorized fees. 1.08 FUEL STORAGE REGISTRATION

A. Contractor shall complete the registration form 62-761.900(2) and provide it the Owner to register the fuel storage tank system in accordance with Florida Administrative Code, Chapter 62-762. Contractor shall provide the completed form to the Owner at least 45 days before putting fuel in the tank.

B. In addition to the notification requirements of the F.A.C., the Contractor shall notify Orange County Risk Management a minimum of 60 days prior to the installation of the fuel storage.

1.09. WARRANTY

A. Special Product Warranty: Submit a 20 year written warranty for the fuel oil storage tanks from date of final acceptance, executed by the manufacturer, agreeing, at the manufacturer's option, to repair the failure, replace the failed tanks (limited to delivery of new tank to the site of original installation), or refund the original purchase price of the tanks.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Products shall be as specified in the specification sections listed in Section 1.02,

above. B. Products containing asbestos shall NOT be used. 2.02 Fuel Tank Labeling Requirements

A. See Section 15192 for labeling requirements. 2.03 Aboveground Fuel Storage Tank

A. All equipment utilized as part of a fuel system installation or upgrade shall meet the most current FDEP approved equipment list as provided on the FDEP Website (Storage Tank Regulations).

B. Storage Tanks

15430-4

1. Description: UL 142 and UL 2085 thermally insulated, fire-resistant and protected, double-wall, horizontal, steel tank; with primary- and secondary-containment walls and insulation and with interstitial space.

2. Construction: Fabricated with welded, carbon steel and insulation and encased in concrete that will protect from bullets; suitable for operation at atmospheric pressure and for storing fuel oil with specific gravity up to 1.1 and with test temperature according to UL 2085.

3. All openings in the tank shall be from the top only. 4. Tank openings shall be threaded except for detector tube. Openings not

used shall be capped. 5. All exposed metal except stainless steel shall be powder coated. 6. The primary steel tanks shall have an Emergency Vent as required by

NFPA 30 with no size reduction allowed for concrete encasement. 7. The protected and insulated AST systems shall have a thru-tank leak

detector tube to allow for physical checkup and monitoring capability between the primary and the secondary containment

8. Normal Vent: Independent of the emergency vent as required by NFPA 9. Steel Tank: Rectangular in shape with 2 lugs for connecting ground

conductors for lightning protection in accordance with NFPA 780. 10. Steel Tank provider to be licensed Steel Tank Industries manufacturer. 11. Tanks shall have exterior protective UV resistant coatings. Color to be

selected by the owner. 12. The tank shall have appropriate warning signs as required by the local and

state jurisdictions. 13. The tank shall be placed on reinforced concrete pad made to

manufacturer's specifications. 14. Hurricane Restraints shall be designed and installed per the requirements

of the Florida Building Code. Design services shall be provided by a licensed Engineer. Signed and sealed calculations shall be submitted for record purposes.

C. Tank Fittings

1. All tank ports shall be Schedule 40 Type 304 Stainless Steel pipe. 2. Primary and secondary tanks shall have no penetrations below the fuel

level, in accordance with UL 2085 requirements.

D. Fittings shall include, at a minimum: 1. Tank fill – 4” MNPT 2. Fill box drain 3. Fuel level gauge – 2” MNPT 4. Primary tank vent – sized per UL 142 requirements (minimum 2”) 5. Primary emergency vent – sized per UL 142 requirements 6. Secondary emergency vent – sized per UL 142 requirements 7. Leak sensor port in secondary containment – 2” MNPT

15430-5

8. One spare port in secondary containment – 2” MNPT 9. Four spare ports – 4” MNPT 10. One 18” manway

E. Remote Fuel Fill Station

1. Furnish as shown on the Drawings, a Remote Fuel Fill Station as detailed

on the Drawings. The Remote Fuel Station shall be complete with all necessary valves, controls, sensors, piping and fittings required to provide a complete system. It shall be integrated with the storage tank.

2. The cabinet shall include integral spill containment, UL Listed, 7 1/2 gallon minimum capacity.

3. Provide a 3-inch dry break poppeted cam lock filler adapter with viton seals, dust cap, and associated piping. Provide OPW Kamvalok Model 1612AN or equal.

4. Provide a 3/4-inch hand operated fuel spill pump, 3/4-inch vertical stainless steel check valve, and associated piping.

5. Provide a mounting bracket for a spill detection sensor. 6. The fill station shall be reinforced to withstand 150 mph sustained winds

and to support the fuel fill control panel. Provide a letter from the manufacturer or the fabricator, signed and sealed by a Florida Registered Engineer, verifying the cabinet shall meet this requirement.

7. The fill station shall be constructed of fuel and corrosion resistant materials.

8. Unit shall be by Simplex, Model CAFP-3, or County approved Tank Accessories

F. Tank Accessories

1. A mechanical level gauge system shall be provided to indicate the liquid

level within the tank. The level gauge shall have a circular gauge indicator mounted on top of the tank. The tank shall include all openings required for the level gauge system and the leak monitoring system. All tank ports shall be Schedule 40 Type 304 Stainless Steel pipe.

2. Vent piping shall be 2-inch stainless steel and shall extend 12-feet above the adjacent finished slab elevation.

3. Vent caps shall be constructed of aluminum and shall include a removable stainless steel screen, similar to No. 63 as manufactured by Dover Corp. or an approved equal.

4. An emergency vent shall be provided for the tank of the size required by code. The emergency vent shall be constructed of an epoxy coated iron lid, aluminum body and a removable stainless steel screen. The emergency vent shall be OPW® Model 201 Series or pre-approved equal.

5. Overfill protection stop valve, capable of stopping diesel fuel flow at 95% tank capacity shall be OPW model 61 fstop-3000 or equal.

15430-6

6. A Double poppet foot valve, OPW model 86 shall be installed inside the aboveground tank at the fuel intake line at a location 6” above the bottom of the tank.

7. An emergency shutoff valve (Fusomatic Valve), OPW Model 178S or equal, shall be installed in the fuel supply line as shown on the schematic.

8. Provide an inline fuel filter/water separator, Racor Model 1000FG or equal, as shown on the fuel supply line.

9. Provide all piping, valves, unions, filters, strainers, and other accessories as shown on the Drawings and/or as required for a complete system.

10. Fire Suppression Kit: Contractor shall furnish a packaged fire suppression kit including 10 lb. extinguisher with vinyl jacket.

G. Fuel Piping

1. Fuel, vent, and level gauge piping shall be Schedule 40, Type 316 stainless

steel welded in conformance with ASTM A-312 and ASTM A-774 stainless steel socket and buttweld fittings.

2. Flexible piping at tank and equipment connections shall be constructed of a seamless flexible plastic liner with corrosion resistant type 316 stainless steel wire braid reinforced cover, stainless steel collars, and stainless steel fittings.

3. Provide all piping, valves, unions, filters, strainers, and other accessories as shown on the Drawings and/or as required for a complete system.

4. An anti-siphon valve, EBW model 605-300-01 shall be installed at the aboveground tank in the fuel intake line, at a location approximately 6” above the top of the tank, or as required by the valve manufacturer. Valve shall be suitable for the final elevations of the aboveground tank and generator as installed.

5. Unions shall be Type 316 stainless steel with fully ground faces. Where threaded unions are required, all threaded connections shall utilize Hercules Chemical Company Inc. multipurpose heavy Teflon “Tape Dope” and “Megaloc and/or Real-tuff.”

6. Manual strainers shall be "Y" type, capable of removing solids 0.01 inch diameter and larger. The strainer body shall be Type 316 stainless steel construction, and shall conform to the latest revision of ASTM A278 (1993), Class 30. Strainer elements, including woven wire mesh, shall be constructed of stainless steel. The design of the strainer body shall be such that the cleanout plug and screen may be easily removed to permit inspection and cleaning without disassembly of the inlet and outlet piping. End connections shall be ANSI screwed pipe threads. Provide three spare screen elements for each strainer furnished. The strainers shall be designed for a maximum operating pressure of 150 psig. They shall be as manufactured by GA Industries Inc., Pittsburgh, PA or approved equal.

7. All piping and supports that are installed outdoors shall be designed and installed to meet wind loadings as required by the Florida Building Code, all other applicable codes, and the requirements of this specification.

15430-7

Design services shall be provided by a licensed Professional Engineer. Signed and sealed calculations shall be submitted for record purposes.

8. All piping and tank supports, including hangers, brackets, fasteners, and miscellaneous metals shall be Type 316 Stainless Steel.

9. Joint compound for steel pipe threaded connections shall be a non- hardening, non-solvent joint sealer.

H. Valves

1. Ball valves shall be manually actuated, bronze, resilient seated, full port,

threaded two-piece bolted body type valves. The body and cap shall be of bronze, ASTM 62; the ball and stem of Type 316 stainless steel; and the seats and seals of TFE. The valve handles shall be lockable. Provide a stainless steel lock with each valve. The valves shall have full floating ball and shall be non-lubricated. Valve seats shall be easily accessible and replaceable. Valves shall be rated to 125 psi and shall be as manufactured by Neles-Jamesbury; WKM or Approved Equal.

2. Three-way ball valves shall be manually actuated, bronze, resilient seated, full port, threaded two-piece bolted body type valves. The body and cap shall be of bronze, ASTM 62; the ball and stem of Type 316 stainless steel; and the seats and seals of TFE. The valve handles shall be lockable. Provide a stainless steel lock with each valve. The valves shall have full floating ball and shall be non-lubricated. Valve seats shall be easily accessible and replaceable. Valves shall be rated to 125 psi and shall be as manufactured by Nibco or Approved Equal.

3. Gate valves shall be manually actuated, bronze, rising stem, brass solid wedge, screw-in bonnet, threaded body type valves. The body shall be of bronze, ASTM 62; the handwheel and stem of Type 316 stainless steel; and the packing of TFE. Valve seats shall be easily accessible and replaceable. Valves shall be rated to 125 psi and shall be as manufactured by Nibco or Approved Equal.

4. Check valves shall be brass, swing type check, threaded body type valves. All parts shall be of brass or bronze construction, the seals shall be of TFE. Valve seats shall be easily accessible and replaceable. Valves shall be rated to 125 psi and shall be as manufactured by Nibco or Approved Equal.

5. Solenoid ball valves shall be 24 Volt electrically actuated, bronze, resilient seated, regular port, threaded two-piece bolted body type valves. The body and cap shall be of brass, ASTM B30 (2000), the ball and stem of Type 316 stainless steel and the seats and seals of TFE. The valves shall have full floating ball and shall be non-lubricated. Valve seats shall be easily accessible and replaceable. Valves shall be rated to 125 psi and shall be as manufactured by Neles-Jamesbury; WKM, Or Approved Equal.

I. Fuel Level and Leak Detection Equipment

15430-8

1. Furnish a complete, FDEP approved electrical monitoring system and associated equipment including but not limited to tank alarm, tank level detection and real time monitoring, tank leak detection, and associated modules for the entire fuel level/leak detection system shown on the drawings and specified herein. The system shall be the Pneumercator Liquid Level Control Systems monitoring system TMS 3000 Series or equal. The system shall include provisions for remote monitoring of the alarm conditions, tank level detection, and tank leak detection including all required terminals, switches, and transmitters.

2. The control unit shall be housed in a NEMA 4X 316 stainless steel enclosure. All probes and sensors shall be rated for outdoor service.

3. The control unit shall use a 120 VAC power source 4. Furnish a Krueger Sentry Gauge Therma Gauge H-2 Stainless Steel Rod

Direct Reading Gauge or approved equal for visible level monitoring. 5. Furnish a Liquid Level Sensor (magnetostrictive level/temperature

transmitter), or approved equal, providing 2 (two) 4-20mA outputs for SCADA.

6. The tank monitoring system shall include provisions for remote monitoring of alarm conditions.

7. The tank monitoring system shall include an integral and remote mounted audible electronic horn and flashing red light to indicate a trouble or leak condition.

8. The tank monitoring system shall meet all applicable regulatory requirements for tank leak detection, monitoring, and reporting.

9. The monitoring system shall be mounted on a stainless steel UNISTRUT® frame or approved equal at locations indicated on drawings or as approved by Engineer and/or Owner. Secure to frame using stainless steel fasteners. Coordinate mounting location with field conditions.

10. Tank level detection – Tank high/low level floats and secondary piping containment sensors shall be custom length PNEUMERCATORTM CO., INC. Model LS-600 Series or FDEP approved equal. The floats and sensors shall be furnished complete with the installation kits, riser caps, seals and other parts as required for a complete installation.

11. Spill Kit – A 30-gallon spill kit shall be provided for the new tank. 12. The supplier shall be responsible for coordinating and providing all

necessary components for a fully functional fuel level and leak detection monitoring system. Any additional components required for a complete system shall be included whether specifically noted or not.

13. Provide complete piping and electrical schematic diagrams for the entire system in the shop drawing submittals.

15430-9

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. General 1. Equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2. All materials and equipment shall be new and free from defects or damage and shall be installed in accordance with the approved recommendations of the manufacturer to conform to the contract documents. The installation shall be accomplished by workmen skilled in this type of work. Equipment shall be erected in a neat manner, shall be aligned, leveled and adjusted to provide satisfactory operation. Installation shall be such that connection and disconnection of piping and accessories can be readily made and so that all parts are easily accessible for inspection, operation, maintenance and repair. Minor deviations from indicated arrangements to provide proper access may be made. 3. Tank installers shall be certified in writing by the tank manufacturer as being qualified to install the equipment. A copy of the certificate shall be submitted to the local authorities prior to proceeding with construction. 4. Fuel storage tanks shall be grounded. 5. The Contractor shall install all warning and safety signs required by the local Fire Marshal and as specified herein.

B. Fuel Piping

1. All pipes shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the site and shall be worked into place without forcing or bending.

2. Piping shall be installed to minimize the quantity of piping joints. Provide unions and/or flexible connections at all equipment connections.

3. Joints shall be fabricated in accordance with standard industry practices and manufacturer's instructions. All joints shall be liquid tight, screwed joints except where flanged connections to equipment or valves are required. Cut pipe square using pipe cutting tool and carefully ream pipe to remove all burrs. Cut a complete thread, using sharp dies properly set and centered, while applying oil graphite cutting lubricant.

4. Aboveground steel piping shall be grounded. Where fittings cause a break in the electrical continuity of the system approval jumpers shall be provided.

5. Refer to Part 2 for requirements for piping mounted outdoors.

C. Flexible Fuel Piping

1. Provide flexible piping connectors at all day tank connections, all generator

15430-10

connections, all storage tank connections and all equipment connections. 2. Flexible connections shall be a minimum of 12-inches long or as required

for equipment removal or maintenance. Protect flexible connectors where physical damage may occur due to adjacent equipment, other piping, wiring, or where subject to possible damage from operating personnel.

D. Leak Sensor Installation

1. Install all level and leak sensing equipment, monitoring panel interface modules and all wiring, conduit, junction boxes, sealing fittings and other material required for a complete operating system.

2. Install all monitoring equipment in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions including compliance with hazardous locations as defined in the National Electrical Code as locally amended and local codes having jurisdiction.

3. Provide instrument identification (tagging), calibration and manufacturer services.

3.02 CLEANING

A. At the conclusion of the work thoroughly clean all pipelines to remove all dirt, stones, pieces of wood or other material which may have entered during the construction period.

B. If defective piping or joints are discovered at this time, they shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner.

3.03 PERMITS

A. Contractor shall contact the local public health department and the local building department for necessary inspections and to obtain required operating permits in the Owner’s name.

B. Contractor shall obtain written approval of the installation from the local fire official of jurisdiction.

3.05 TESTING

A. Tanks shall be tested in accordance with manufacturer's installation requirements by Contractor under observation of the County and the FDEP prior to filling with fuel.

B. Install all monitoring equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions including compliance with hazardous locations as defined in the NEC Articles 500 through 514, where applicable, as locally amended and local codes which have jurisdiction.

C. Provide instrument identification (tagging), calibration and manufacturer services. D. At a minimum, tanks shall be capable of holding 5-psi of air for test period of 4-

hours in the tank interior. While tank is under pressure, the tank and fittings shall be

15430-11

checked for leaks with soap/water mixture. Tank under test pressure shall not be left unattended.

E. At a minimum, tanks annular space shall be capable of holding a vacuum of 15- inches H2O for 30-minutes.

F. Piping shall be tested in strict accordance with the manufacturer's testing requirements. Piping systems shall be tested upon completion of the roughing-in before setting equipment. The entire system shall be pressure tested with fuel at 25- psig and proved tight at this pressure for a period of 4-hours. Defective work or material shall be replaced and retested. The system shall be test plugged or capped prior to testing to prevent test pressure from reaching any equipment or storage tank.

G. Contractor shall provide fuel for any required testing and retesting. If the fuel subsequently becomes contaminated, the Contractor shall dispose of the fuel in accordance with all FDEP regulations and at no cost to the County.

H. The Contractor with County Risk Management shall arrange for testing and inspection of the tank by the FDEP representative and the approved DEP inspection report shall be provided prior to station startup. The Contractor shall coordinate with County Risk Management and the Contractor shall be responsible for submitting and preparing all registration forms, notifications and other regulatory requirements in coordination with the City.

3.06 SIGNAGE

A. Tank signage most adhere to all references regulations, including but not limited to: NFPA, FDEP, PEI.

END OF SECTION

15504-1

SECTION 15504

REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Provide refrigerant piping systems complete with all accessories as specified herein and/or as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Pressure test all refrigerant piping systems as specified herein.

1.02 REFERENCES

American National Standards Institute (ANSI) American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM)

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's catalog data for all materials and equipment listed under this section.

B. Submit a list of all recommended spare parts and one set of spare parts to be turned over to the owner at final acceptance.

C. Submit the manufacturer’s standard warranty (minimum five years) on all systems provided herein.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING

A. Refrigerant Piping shall be copper ACR tubing Type L hard drawn or Type K per ASTM B280 and shall be cleaned, dehydrated, charged with gaseous nitrogen and sealed. Fittings shall be forged or wrought copper. Joints shall be brazed silver.

B. Condensate Drain Piping pipe shall be Type M hard drawn per ASTM B88. Fittings

shall be wrought copper or cast brass. Joints shall be lead free, tin-silver solder. 2.02 FILTER DRIERS

A. Filter/dryers in sizes 1/2" and larger shall be the full-flow, replaceable-core type. Sizes smaller than 1/2" shall be the sealed type. Cores shall be of a suitable desiccant that will not plug, cake, dust, channel, or break down but shall remove water, acid,

15504-2

and foreign material from the refrigerant. The dryer shall be constructed so that no desiccant will pass into the refrigerant lines. A filter/dryer shall be provided in the liquid line to each evaporator and shall be piped with two isolation valves. Pressure drop through the dryer shall not exceed 2 psi when operating at full connected evaporator capacity.

B. Liquid Sight Glasses. Sight glasses shall be double glass, see-through type, with

cover cap on each side. Sight glass shall be provided in liquid line immediately preceding each expansion valve. Glass shall be furnished with a color-change-type moisture indicator.

C. Moisture Indicators. Color-change moisture indicators shall be provided downstream

from each filter/dryer and bypass or shall be combined as a single unit in the liquid sight glasses.

D. Shutoff Valves. Shutoff valves shall be packless diaphragm (in sizes commercially

available), with packed, ground-finish stem, key operated, back seating, sealed-cap type; otherwise, angle pattern valves shall be used whenever possible.

E. Solenoid Valves. Valves shall be brass or steel body, packless type, with corrosion-

resistant steel trim, rated for continuous-duty service, direct-or pilot-operated, provided with manual lift stems, and designed for use with type of refrigerant used. The valve capacities shall be sufficient for the requirements of the installation at a pressure drop not in excess of 2 psi. Valves in suction lines shall be sized in accordance with temperature rise and superheat normal to the system.

F. Expansion Valves. Shall be thermal-expansion type to suit specific system

refrigerant, designed to fit coil distributors, and capable of operating from 40 to 100 percent of full load at system head pressure without hunting or liquid hammer. Valves shall have external equalizer connections and external superheat adjustments with seal caps. Joint connections shall be mechanical threaded or flanged type. Valves shall require not over 4 degrees F. superheat change to move from fully open to fully closed position. Superheat setting shall be 10 degrees F. at full load. Expansion valves shall be balanced double seated or pilot operated, capable of stable operation at 15 percent design load. Each valve shall be provided with external strainer.


A. Piping shall be accurately cut to measurements established at the project site, worked into place without springing or forcing, run as directly as possible, run parallel or perpendicular to building lines, located as indicated on the Drawings and supported

15504-3

as specified elsewhere. Parallel piping shall be grouped together as much as practical. Piping shall be supported as high as practical. Piping not located in mechanical rooms shall be concealed unless noted otherwise.

B. Piping shall be run as directly as possible, avoiding all unnecessary fittings and

joints. Changes in routing of piping due to field conditions shall be at the expense of this Contractor.

C. Provide sleeves for all piping penetrations of floors and walls. Sleeves for insulated

piping above grade shall be sized for the insulation diameter. D. Provide escutcheon plates at each exposed piping penetration of walls and ceilings.

Escutcheon plates for insulated piping shall be sized for the insulation diameter. 3.02 REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Provide a complete refrigerant tubing system as indicated on the Drawings. B. All refrigerant piping shall be ACR Type L hard drawn tubing except for exposed

piping in public areas which shall be ACR Type K tubing. C. Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, all refrigerant lines shall be sized in

accordance with the equipment manufacturer’s recommendations. D. All elbows in refrigerant piping systems shall be long radius elbows. E. Joints shall be silver brazed using a continuous flow of nitrogen inside the piping to

prevent oxidation. F. All piping shall be rigidly supported, refer to specification section 15126. G. Provide filter driers, sight glasses, moisture indicators, shutoff valves, solenoid

valves and expansion valves when not provided as standard or as an option on equipment. Components shall be specifically designed for refrigeration service.

H. Pressure test each piping system at 150 psig using dry nitrogen. Test each joint for

leaks by spraying with soapy water. Joints that leak shall be disassembled, cleaned to bare copper and silver brazed again. Pressure test shall be repeated until all joints pass.

I. Vacuum test each piping system after pressure test is completed. Piping shall be

drawn to 500 microns of HG and tested for 12 hours without additional pumping. If piping system fails vacuum test repeat pressure test.

J. Charge each piping system after vacuum test is completed. Charge each system per

15504-4

manufacturer's instructions. Halide torch test each joint after charging. 3.03 CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING

A. Provide condensate drain trap of sufficient depth to allow proper drainage of condensate.

B. Slope piping at a uniform slope of at least 1/8" per foot to ensure proper drainage. C. Condensate drain lines shall be adequately supported to prevent low points which

would cause "Double Trapping". D. Condensate drain lines indicated to be terminated at floor drains shall either be turned

down through this floor drain grate or be provided an indirect waste funnel for the floor drain.

END OF SECTION

15682-1

SECTION 15682

AIR COOLED SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. The work of this section consists of providing all material, labor and equipment necessary for the fabrication and installation of all equipment and appurtenances specified herein and as indicated on the drawings.

1. 7 1/2 - 17 ton 3 phase units.

B. Not all the equipment specified herein may be used on this project. Refer to

schedules on drawings for equipment requirements. C. All compressors shall have 10 year warranty.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit catalog data, shop drawings and installation instructions prior to commencement of work for all materials and equipment incorporated into the drawings and specified herein.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A. 7 1/2 - 20 Tons Split System Heat Pumps

1. Units shall be UL listed, CSA certified and rated in accordance with A.R.I.

2. Condenser coils shall be internally finned or smooth bore 3/8 inch copper tubing mechanically bonded to configured aluminum plate fin. Coils shall be factory pressure tested.

3. Condensing units shall be completely factory wired and tested, control wiring shall be 24 volt. Provide head pressure control for operation to 0 degrees F. Provide anti-short cycle timer to prevent rapid on-off compressor cycling. Provide condenser coil guards, crankcase heaters, temperature and current sensing motor overloads, electronic defrost system, outdoor temperature sensor and switchover valve.

4. 7-1/2-20 ton units shall be dual compressor, consisting of at least one variable capacity scroll compressor. Dual compressor units shall have dual

15682-2

independent refrigeration circuits with dual integral sub-cooling circuit. Each unit shall be provided with high and low pressure cutout devices and evaporator defrost control.

5. Units shall be AAON CCB series or equals by Trane, Carrier and Lennox.


A. All equipment shall be installed in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer.

B. Refrigerant line sizes may differ from what is indicated on the prints with different

manufacturers. This contractor is responsible for any changes or accessories required due to the specific requirements of a particular manufacturer. All refrigerant lines shall be sized by the manufacturer and approved by the engineer prior to any work commencement.

C. Provide and install any accessories necessary for a complete and functioning system. D. All condensers shall be set on 6" thick concrete slabs for on grade installations.

END OF SECTION

15731-1

SECTION 15731

AIR HANDLING UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. The work of this section consists of providing all labor, materials and services necessary for the fabrication and installation of all equipment and appurtenances specified herein and indicated on the drawings.

B. Not all items in this section may be used. Refer to the related equipment schedule for

relative information to this section. C. Provide 10 year warranty on air handling units.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit catalog data, shop drawings and installation instructions prior to commencement of work for all materials and equipment incorporated into the drawings and specified herein.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A. Provide air handling units of the type, configuration and capacity as specified herein and as indicated on the drawings. Units shall be complete with fans, motors, safety devices, wiring terminals, fan relays and control transformers. Units shall be provided with all accessories required to permit the mounting configuration indicated on the drawings. Units shall be UL listed.

B. Cabinets shall be constructed of cold-rolled steel with baked enamel finish. Cabinets

shall be provided with factory installed internal insulation as required to eliminate condensation, full size access panels for access to all internal components, supply and return duct connection flanges, filter racks and filters.

C. Direct drive fans shall be backward curved, plenum type and be statically and

dynamically balanced. Fans shall be mounted on motor shafts. Motors shall be factory lubricated, resiliently mounted, multi-speed, permanent split capacitor type with internal overload protection. Fan-motor assembly shall slide out for service.

D. Belt driven fans shall be backward curved, plenum type and be statically and

dynamically balanced with adjustable belt drive. Thermal overload protection shall be standard on motors. Fans and motor bearings shall be permanently lubricated.

15731-2

E. Units Equipped with DX Coils

DX Coils shall be constructed of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to nonferrous tubing. All joints shall be brazed. Coils shall be provided with a properly sized refrigerant metering device. Metering device shall be manufacturer's standard device unless indicated otherwise. Coils shall be provided with refrigerant line fittings to permit mechanical connections. Coils shall be provided with condensate drain pans with primary and auxiliary drain connections.

I. Equal to AAON, Carrier, Trane or Lennox.


A. All equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer installation instructions.

B. Provide thermal expansion valves on DX coils. C. Provide vibration isolators for air handling units see specifications and drawings for

types, quantities, etc. D. Provide any accessories necessary for a complete and functioning system. E. For air handling units above ceiling provide drain pans under the complete unit with

auxiliary drain. Pipe drain to a conspicuous area, as indicated on the drawings.

END OF SECTION

15754-1

SECTION 15754

CENTRIFUGAL IN LINE CABINET VENTILATORS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Provide ventilating systems as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein with

all accessories required for proper system balance. 1.02 REFERENCES

Air Diffusion Council (ADC)

Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA)

American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)

National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA)

Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL)

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit catalog data and shop drawings for all materials and equipment listed under this section.

B. Submit copy of manufacturer’s five year (minimum) warranty for products specified herein.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CENTRIFUGAL IN LINE CABINET VENTILATORS

A. Inline Centrifugal Fans shall be UL listed and bear the AMCA Seal for air and sound

performance. Housings shall be constructed of galvanized steel panels with structural members for rigidity. Housings shall have access panels for full access to all components, inlet and outlet duct connection flanges and a deep spun venturi inlet. Direct drive fans shall have motor, fan wheels shall be constructed of aluminum, be statically and dynamically balanced and backward curved, non- overloading type. Drives of belt drive fans shall have shafts mounted with heavy

15754-2

duty, permanently lubricated, sealed ball bearings and be equipped with variable pitch, cast iron pulleys. Drives shall be sized for a minimum of 150 percent of driven power. Motors shall have permanently lubricated, sealed ball bearings and be factory wired with flexible leads and disconnect switches to permit service without disconnecting field wiring.

B. The following accessories shall be provided when indicated in the fan schedule:

1. Hanging or base mounted vibration isolators 2. Motor Cover/Belt Guard with or without insulation, as scheduled. 3. Insulated housing with fiberglass duct liner 4. Backdraft Dampers 5. Protective Coating

C. Manufacturers shall be Carnes, Acme, Greenheck or approved equals.

2.02 GENERAL

A. Provide and install fans and accessories as scheduled on the Drawings and specified

in this Section.

B. Fan air performance ratings shall be in accordance with AMCA Standard 210.

C. Fan sound performance ratings shall be in accordance with AMCA Standard 300. Sound levels shall not exceed specified level at specified air delivery conditions.

D. Fan performance based on sea level conditions.

E. Equivalent fan selections shall not decrease motor horsepower (wattage), increase

noise level, increase tip speed by more than 10 percent, from that specified.

F. Provide fans capable of accommodating static pressure variations of plus or minus 10 percent.

G. Provide balanced variable sheaves for all motors with the size selected at midpoint in

the adjustment.

H. Statically and dynamically balance fans to eliminate vibration or noise transmission to occupied areas of the building.

I. Provide belt guards on belt driven fans and safety screens where inlet or outlet is

exposed.

J. Fan wheels and housings not of aluminum or stainless steel shall be factory primed inside and outside.

15754-3

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CENTRIFUGAL IN LINE CABINET VENTILATORS

A. Set and install in line fans as specified and indicated on the drawings.

B. Equipment installation shall be such that filters, motors, bearings and belts can be

easily serviced.

C. Provide flexible connectors (specified elsewhere) at inlet and outlet of in line fans.

D. All fans shall be checked for proper rotation and be lubricated before start up.

E. Provide three sets of spare filters and belts and a three year supply of any required lubricants for all equipment and turn over to the owner at final acceptance.

END OF SECTION

15756-1

SECTION 15756

CEILING AND CABINET VENTILATORS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Provide Ventilating systems as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein with

all accessories required for proper system balance. 1.02 REFERENCES



American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)


Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA)

Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit catalog data and shop drawings for all materials and equipment listed under the section.

B. Submit five year manufacturer’s warranty for all equipment provided under this specification.

C. Submit a list of all spare parts recommended for equipment provided under this specification and provide one set of spares to the owner at final acceptance.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CEILING AND CABINET VENTILATORS

A. Cabinet Mounted Centrifugal Fans shall be UL listed and bear the AMCA Seal for air

and sound performance. Housings shall have an integral backdraft damper, be acoustically insulated, convertible to either horizontal or vertical discharge and equipped with a white intake grille. Fan wheel shall be direct driven, dynamically balanced, forward curved type. Motors shall have internal thermal overload protection, be compatible with speed controllers, mounted on vibration isolators and

15756-2

factory wired for easy disconnect for inspection and service.

B. Ventilators shall be equipped with mounting brackets readily adapted to various mountings.

C. The following accessories shall be provided when indicated in the fan schedule:

1. Vibration Isolation 2. Speed Control 3. Protective coating

D. Manufacturers shall be: Carnes, Greenheck, Acme or approved equals.

2.02 GENERAL

A. Provide and install fans and accessories as scheduled on the Drawings and specified

in this Section.

B. Fan air performance ratings shall be in accordance with AMCA Standard 210.

C. Fan sound performance ratings shall be in accordance with AMCA Standard 300. Sound levels shall not exceed specified level at specified air delivery conditions.

D. Fan performance based on sea level conditions.

E. Equivalent fan selections shall not decrease motor horsepower (wattage), increase

noise level, increase tip speed by more than 10 percent, or increase inlet air velocity by more than 10 percent, from that specified.

F. Provide fans capable of accommodating static pressure variations of plus or minus 10

percent.

G. Statically and dynamically balance fans to eliminate vibration or noise transmission to occupied areas of the building.

H. Fan wheels and housings not of aluminum or stainless steel shall be factory primed

inside and outside. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 CEILING AND CABINET VENTILATORS

A. Set and install fans as specified and indicated on the drawings.

15756-3

B. Equipment installation shall be such that filters, motors, bearings can be easily serviced.

C. Provide flexible connectors (specified elsewhere) at outlet of ceiling fans.

D. All fans shall be checked for proper rotation and be lubricated before start up.

E. Provide three sets of spare filters and belts and a three year supply of any required

lubricants for all equipment and turn over to the owner at final acceptance.

END OF SECTION

15881-1

SECTION 15881

GALVANIZED SHEET METAL DUCTWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Provide a galvanized sheet metal ductwork system as indicated on the drawings,

complete with all accessories specified herein and as required for proper system operation and balance.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Section 15258 - DUCTWORK INSULATION

1.03 REFERENCES



American Society of Heating Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)


Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA)


1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit catalogue data and shop drawings for all materials and equipment listed under this section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GALVANIZED SHEET METAL DUCTWORK

A. Sheet Metal Ductwork

Galvanized steel ductwork shall be carbon steel, of lock-forming quality, hot dip

15881-2

galvanized, with regular spangle-type zinc coating, conforming to ASTM A- 527/A527M-G90.

Sheet metal gages and reinforcement shall conform to the latest edition SMACNA HVAC duct construction standards, with the exception that 24 gage will be the thinnest gage allowed for rectangular ductwork.

Round sheet metal ducts shall use the following gages:

Duct Max. 2" W.G. Max. 10" W.G. Max. 2" W.G. Dia. Positive

Static Press. Positive Static Press.

Negative Static Press.

3-8 28 24 24 9-14 26 24 24 15-26 24 22 22 27-36 22 20 20 37-50 20 20 18 51-60 18 18 16 61-84 16 16 14

2.02 DUCTWORK SEALANT

A. Sealant shall be non-flammable when wet, fire resistive when dry, and suitable for

use in high velocity ductwork. Shall meet NFPA 90A and 90B and be UL classified. Sealant shall have a maximum 25 flame spread and 50 smoke developed (dry state) compound specifically for sealing ductwork.

B. Tape for use with duct sealant shall be specifically designated by the manufacturer

for ductwork sealing. 2.03 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES

A. General

Provide duct accessories as indicated on the drawings and as required for proper system operation and balance.

B. Flexible Duct Connections

Flexible duct connections shall be UL listed fire retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric connections, shall conform to NFPA 90A and 90B and have a maximum flame spread rating of 25 and a maximum smoke development rating of 50.

15881-3

1. For static pressures up to 3", flexible connection fabric shall be 22 oz./sq. yard and 3" wide with 3" metal on either side of fabric. Equal to Duro Dyne #10105 MLN Metalfab or equal.

2. For static pressures 3" or greater, flexible connection fabric shall be 30 oz./sq.

yard and 3" wide with 3" wide metal on either side of fabric. Equal to Duro Dyne #10003 MFN Metalfab.

C. Manual Balancing Dampers

1. Dampers in rectangular ductwork of 12" depth or less shall be single blade

type with extended shaft for damper quadrant. Dampers shall be Airstream, Model PBD-5, or approved equal.

2. Dampers in rectangular ductwork of greater than 12" depth shall be opposed

blade type, complete with tie rods, and with extended shaft for damper quadrant. Blades shall be 6" width, maximum. Dampers shall be Airstream, Model OBD-11, or approved equal.

3. Dampers in round ductwork shall be single blade type with 20 gauge X 7"

long galvanized steel frame and 20 gauge galvanized steel blade. Frames shall be beaded on each end. Shafts shall be 1/2" diameter, mounted with bearings and locking quadrant with insulation standoff. Dampers shall be Ruskin, Model MDRS25 or approved equal by Airstream, Air Balance, Louvers and Dampers or Vent Products.

All dampers shall have an operable blade area equal to the duct net area. No blank off plates will be allowed in place of non-standard blade widths.

D. Splitter Dampers shall be fabricated form 16-gauge steel with a hemmed leading

edge; trailing edge shall be pivoted on a rod or hinges; install in accordance with the latest edition a SMACNA's Low Velocity Manual. Secure rod to leading edge of damper and extend rod through side of ductwork using Ventlock #603 ball joint bracket with set screw.

E. Damper Quadrants shall have indicators showing open and closed positions, and shall

be Ventfabrics, "Ventlock", as follows:

1. Dampers with shaft length 12" or less - No. 620 for base ductwork and No. 637 for insulated ductwork.

2. Dampers with shaft length longer than 12" - No. 637.

15881-4

F. Turning Vanes

Turning Vanes shall be double thickness, 4.5 inches wide and spaced 3.25 inches apart, as manufactured by Barber Coleman, Titus, Airturns, or equal.

G. Access Door

Duct Access Doors shall be UL labeled, galvanized steel, double panel construction, internally insulated with minimum 1 inch thick fiberglass insulation complete with gaskets and quick opening locking devices in accordance with SMACNA standards. Access doors shall be removable. Access doors with sheet metal screws are not acceptable.

2.04 DUCT LINER

All ducts indicated on drawings to be internally lined shall be lined in accordance with specification Section 15258.

2.05 SPIN-IN COLLARS

Spin-In Collars for round branch duct take-offs shall be factory fabricated from galvanized sheet metal and shall be in the following configurations as shown on the drawings.

A. Straight Spin-In

Sizes 4" through 20" shall be 26" gage, Spin-In shall be equipped with a factory assembled adjustable damper with insulation standoff. Spin-In collars to be installed in internally lined duct shall be provided with an insulation guard. Scoops are not to be provided. Equal to JER-AIR model S-3.

B. Conical Spin-Ins

Sizes 4" through 16" shall be 26 gage. Spin-In end of fitting shall be 2 inches larger that the branch duct size. Spin-In shall be equipped with a factory assembled adjustable damper with insulation standoff. Spin-in Collars to be installed in internally lined duct shall be provided with an insulation guard. Scoops are not to be provided. Equal to Metal Manufacture model MSIT-5.

2.06 INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK

A. Insulated flexible duct shall be listed under UL standard 181 as class 1 air duct and

shall comply with NFPA standards 90A and 90B. The duct shall be 25/50 rated for flame spread/smoke developed.

15881-5

B. The duct shall be rated for 6 inches W.G. positive pressure and 2 inches W.G. negative pressure. The rated temperature range shall be 0 to 189 degrees F. The UL rated velocity shall be 4000 fpm.

C. The duct shall be constructed with corrosion resistant steel wire helix permanently

bonded to multiple layers of either reinforced aluminum foil polyester laminate or coated woven fiberglass.

D. The duct shall be insulated with 1 1/2 inch thick, 3/4 pound density fiberglass blanket

with a K value of 0.25 at 75 degrees F.

E. The vapor barrier shall be fiber glass reinforced metallized film laminate with a permeance of 0.1 perm.

F. Insulated flexible duct shall be equal to Wiremold Type WCK or Thermoflex Type

M-KC. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GALVANIZED SHEET METAL DUCTWORK

A. Sheet Metal Ductwork shall be fabricated and installed per the latest edition of the

SMACNA HVAC duct construction standards and ASHRAE Handbook.

B. All ductwork shall be supported in accordance with SMACNA standards. All threaded rod supports shall be double nutted.

C. Duct transitions shall be gradual, the angle of the side of the transition piece shall not

exceed 15 degrees form the straight run of duct extended.

D. All rectangular duct elbows shall be fabricated in accordance with either of the following:

1. Radius Elbow - All radius elbows shall have a centerline radius equal to 1.5

times the width of the duct. This results in an inside radius equal to the width of the duct. Under no circumstances will radius elbows with a centerline radius of 0.5 times the duct width and an inside radius of 0.0 (90 degrees angle) be allowed.

2. Mitered Elbow (Square Throat - Square Heel) - Where radius elbows will not

fit, a mitered elbow will be required. All mitered elbows with an angle over 45 shall be provided with turning valves.

E. All duct sizes shown on plans are net free area.

15881-6

3.02 DUCT SEALANT

All duct systems shall be sealed to meet SMACNA seal class C. Seal per SMCNA recommended methods with sealant or sealant plus tape as appropriate.

3.03 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES

A. Flexible duct connection shall be installed on all ductwork required to be attached to

motor driven equipment.

The ends of the flexible connection shall be overlapped and sealed, to prevent air leakage, per the manufacturers recommendations. If manufacturer does not have recommended method of sealing, the following method shall be used. Both ends of the flexible connection shall be extended three inches and turned inward (into air stream). Silicone caulking shall be applied between the overlap and outward clinching staples shall be used to fasten the lap.

B. Manual Balancing Dampers, Splitter Dampers, Quadrant Dampers

All damper shall be installed so that damper blades have a full range of movement without interference or binding. Damper quadrant shall be located to provide easy access.

C. Turning Vanes

Turning vanes shall be installed in all mitered (Square Toe-Square Heel) elbows with an angle greater than 45 degrees. Turning vanes shall be 4.5 inches wide, on 3.25 inch centers and be double thickness.

Turning vanes shall be installed tangent to the air stream.

3.04 SPIN COLLARS

A. Spin collars shall be installed in accurately cut openings in the sheet metal duct work.

B. Spin collars shall be suitably sealed for the pressure class required.

C. The quadrant damper shall be checked for free movement and left in the full open

position after the spin collar is installed.

15881-7

3.05 INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK

A. For runouts to air distribution devices the length of flexible duct work shall not exceed 5 feet. For lengths of duct required over 5 feet, the remainder shall be galvanized steel round duct.

B. Bends in flexible duct shall be made with not less than 1 duct diameter centerline

radius. Extend flexible duct a few inches beyond end of sheet metal connection before bending.

C. Flexible duct shall be installed and supplied in accordance with SMACNA standards.

D. Flexible duct shall be secured to sheet metal duct with a draw band and independent

of flexible duct insulation. The insulation shall be secured with a separate draw band.

END OF SECTION

15883-1

SECTION 15883

DIFFUSERS, GRILLES, REGISTERS AND LOUVERS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 Work Included

Provide all air distribution devices as scheduled and shown on the drawings and as specified herein.

1.02 References


American Society of Heating Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)


Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA)


1.03 Submittals

Submit catalog data, shop drawings and color samples for all materials and equipment listed under this section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Air diffusion devices shall be fabricated and mounted to prevent all flutter, rattle

and vibration.

B. Air diffusion devices shall be provided with the type frame and for the type mounting as schedule on the drawings.

C. Accessories for the air diffusion devices shall be those listed in the schedule on

the drawings.

15883-2

D. The air diffusion devices shall be provided in the color as scheduled on the drawings.

E. All air diffusion devices shall be provided with a gasket where they are to be

mounted in a finished surface.

F. Air diffusion device volume and pattern adjustments shall be able to be made from the face of the device.

G. Air patterns (1-way, 2-way corner, 2-way opposed, 3-way and 4-way) shall be as

shown on the plans. 2.02 Diffusion Devices - General

All of the diffusion devices listed herein may not be used on the project. Contractor shall provide only those devices listed in the schedule on the drawings.

2.03 Supply Air Devices

A. Louvered Face - Surface

Extruded aluminum construction. Core shall be removable from face. Square face and round neck. Beveled border Non-adjustable braced louvers.

Equal to: Metalaire series 5000, Model M-2.

Titus TDCA-AA, Border Style 6. Reliable RCSDB. Carnes SASA

B. Louvered Face - Lay-in

Extruded aluminum construction Square face and round neck Core shall be removable from face. Auxiliary aluminum lay-in panel for 2x2 grid. Nonadjustable braced louvers.

Equal to: Metalaire Series 5000, Model M-6

Titus TDCA-AA, Border Style 3 Reliable RCSD-T W/ALIP

15883-3

D. Double Deflection Supply Register - Surface

Extruded aluminum construction Double deflection blades with vertical face blades. Both vertical and horizontal blades adjustable through 45o 2/3" Blade spacing. Blades shall be semi airfoil design

Equal to: Metalaire series V4004

Titus Model 300FL or S300FL Reliable Model G2V Carnes Model RAFAV

2.04 Return Air Devices

A. Single Deflection - Surface

Extruded Aluminum Construction Fixed single deflection vertical blades Shall exactly match double deflection supply grille. Blades shall be semi-airfoil design.

Equal to: Metalaire Model V4002R.

Titus Model 350 FL Carnes Model RAHAV

B. Eggcrate – Surface

Aluminum border and core ½” x ½” x ½” eggcrate grid core

Equal to: Metalair Model EPCC5

Titus Model 50F Carnes Model RAPA

2.05 Exhaust Air Devices

A. Single Deflection - Surface

Extruded Aluminum Construction Fixed single deflection vertical blades Shall exactly match double deflection supply grille Blades shall be semi-airfoil design

Equal To: Metalaire Model V4002 R

15883-4

Titus Model 350FL Carnes Model RAHAV

2.06 Louvers

All louvers shall be AMCA Certified and Florida Product Approved. Performance Ratings based on testing in accordance with AMCA Standard 500.

A. Six Inch Drainable

Florida Product Approved Extruded Aluminum Construction Six Inches Deep Bird Screen Each blade to have single drainable channel draining into frame downspouts on either side. Type frame (box or flange) and accessories shall be as scheduled.

Equal to: Ruskin ELF 6375DXD

Greenheck ESD-635X Arrow Type EA-32

2.08 Accessories

A. General

1. The accessories to be provided with each device shall be as shown on the

drawing schedule. All accessories specified herein may not be used on this project.

2. Accessories shall be of the same material construction as the air device

itself.

B. Supply, Return and Exhaust Device Accessories

1. Opposed Blade Damper

Damper shall be rigidly attached to the air device blades shall pivot in nylon bushings. Damper operator shall be accessible from face of air device. Damper shall be of the same manufacturer as the air device.

2. Square to round transitions - Standard

Transitions shall slip over air device to be attached with sheet metal screws. The round size shall be determined by the size round duct

15883-5

supplying the air device.

3. Square to round transitions - For ceiling radiation dampers.

Transition shall be the same as the standard square to round transition except that the "square" side of the transition shall be tall enough to house a ceiling radiation damper.

C. Louver Accessories

1. Extended Sill

Extended sill shall be provided with the same finish as the louver.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 General

A. All air devices shall be installed square, straight and level and in accordance with

manufacturers recommendations.

B. All openings to be cut in finished surfaces shall be completely hidden behind flange/frame of air device.

C. All devices in lay-in ceiling shall be supported from T-Bar grid. No devices will

be allowed to be supported by tile. D. All openings in drywall surfaces for air devices shall be framed. Coordinate with

general contractor.

E. All finished surfaces of air devices that have been scratched or marred during construction shall be touched up by the contractor. All damaged areas that cannot be suitably repaired shall be replaced.

F. Seal each side of louver at opening.

END OF SECTION

15955-1

SECTION 15955

TEMPERATURE CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Provide a complete automatic temperature control system as indicated on thedrawings and as specified herein for proper system control.

B. Provide:

1. Identification of Controls System Components2. Valves, Dampers and Actuators3. Control System Wiring and Conduit4. Portable Operators Terminal5. Sensors, Transmitters, Transducers, Relays, Enclosures6. Distributed Processing DDC7. Training of Operations Personnel8. As-Builts and Framed Approved Control Diagrams

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer's literature and data for all components including the following:

1. Controllers2. Control Dampers, Control Valves and Actuators3. Temperature Control Panel Sizes and Faceplate Layout4. Instrumentation Products

B. Control Drawings:

1. AutoCAD drawing files.2. Three complete sets of prints

1.03 CONTROL SYSTEMS

A. Furnish and install complete and ready for operation with control sequences asindicated on the drawings.

15955-2

B. Control equipment, except for items comprising an integral part of the water orrefrigeration system, shall be installed by trained mechanic employed by the controlcontractor.

C. Include the services of a full time control technician for calibrating controls for thefirst 5 working days after owner has occupied building.

D. Before installation, submit for approval one set of reproducible drawings and onecomplete set of diagrams. Hang a photostatic copy of the approved diagram, framedbehind glass in each mechanical room. Provide one set of reproducible "As-Built"control diagrams at completion of the project for the Owners use.

E. Provide permanent nameplates for control switches and motor starters. Nameplates:Engraved laminated plastic with letters legible under normal operating conditions(White on Black).

F. Permanently identify control devices other than room thermostats, so they may beidentified on control diagrams. Provide engraved plastic nameplates for itemsmounted outside of or on faces of panels. Mark other instruments with inducible ink.

G. The control contractor shall have a five year record of installation and service oftemperature controls within 100 miles of the project area for similar types of systems.Acceptable manufacturers are Trane, Johnson Controls or approved equal.

1.04 CONTROL WIRING

A. Include all control and interlocking wiring and power wiring for control panel in thissection. Install in conduit in accordance with provisions of the electricalspecifications.

B. Firestop conduit penetrations of fire rated walls and partitions.

C. Wire all devices individually to terminal strips in control panels.

D. Furnish necessary relays and auxiliary contactors and other accessories required.Provide interlock relays per N.E.C. Coordinate start-up stations, auxiliary contacts,etc., with supplier of starters and motor control centers specified in electrical work.

15955-3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLLER (DDC)

A. The DDC's shall be microprocessor based units that monitor the HVAC equipmentthrough the proper control mode, maintain the desired conditions by operating theproper activators and switching devices. All control programs shall be resident ineach DDC. Each controller shall contain all necessary electronic circuits utilizingstate of the art digital and microprocessor technology and shall be contained in aprotective metal housing.

B. Provide a minimum of 48 hours of battery back-up to protect the volatile memory ofeach controller.

C. Failure of any other DDC or system processor shall not degrade the operation ofother controllers in the system.

2.02 PORTABLE OPERATOR TERMINAL

Provide a portable terminal capable of addressing all system parameters at each remotecontroller. The terminal shall be capable of readout and adjustment of all setpoints,temperatures, throttling ranges, reset times, rate control parameters, enthalpy, volume (CFMand GPM), time and date schedules, etc., via an LED display and shall provide for systementry via a keyboard or keypad arrangement. Provide licensed software if needed. Providecomputer with 21” screen for this system/work station.

2.03 ELECTRONIC TEMPERATURE SENSORS

A. Electronic temperature sensors shall be of corrosion resistant construction, tamperproof, suitable for mounting on a vibrating surface.

B. All duct mounted temperature sensors (except outdoor and return air) shall have aminimum 20 foot capillary average element.

C. All sensing elements for water pipe mounting shall be furnished complete withprotecting wells filled with heat conducting compound.

D. Space temperature sensors shall be provided with room type locking covers.

E. Sensors shall be factory calibrated and shall be thin film platinum.

15955-4

2.04 ELECTRONIC STATIC PRESSURE SENSORS

Electronic static pressure sensors shall be of the strain gauge type with 4-20 mA or 0-1 VDCoutput. Static accuracy shall be not more than 2% or span. Provide appropriate span foreach application: 0-2" water column for duct static pressure and 0-0.5 inches of water columnfor velocity pressure. Sensors shall be Dwyer, Celesco, or approved equal.

2.05 ELECTRONIC DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSORS

Electronic differential pressure sensors shall be of the industrial type with plus or minus 1% accuracyover the entire span of the instrument. Span shall be appropriate for the application. Approvedmanufacturers are ITE, Honeywell, Foxboro, Fisher, and Moore Industries. Use of pneumaticdifferential pressure sensors shall not be acceptable.

2.06 AUTOMATIC DAMPERS

Automatic dampers shall be opposed blade type with adjacent blades rotating in opposite directions.They shall be furnished in standard sizes using damper louvers 4 inches in width. Damper bladelength shall be a minimum of 12 inches to a maximum of 48 inches. Where larger dampers arerequired, provide the necessary shaft and blade linkages to allow multiple sections to operate as asingle damper. Dampers shall be provided with solid stops for tight closing with vinyl seals on theblade edges and flexible metal compression type sides of the damper frame, which will stand atemperature of up to 200 degrees F. These stops shall be so assembled that they may be easilyreplaced if they become damaged. Dampers shall be tightly closing and shall be capable of less than1% at the applied static pressure. Bearings shall be oilite or nylon. Dampers shall be provided withpneumatic operators of the proper size to provide the control sequence desired and shall be equippedwith pilot positioners where required to provide sequence action. Damper linkage shall be providedeither linear or equal percentage air flow the control system manufacturer to provide all necessarydevices, electronic circuitry, and other equipment to make the output of the DDC system compatiblewith the motor controller. Pneumatic signals will not be acceptable for this purpose and shall not inany way be used to control the variable speed motor drives.

2.07 VALVE AND DAMPER ACTUATORS

A. Electric valve and damper motors (where indicated) shall have oil immersed geartrains and spring return to normal position.

B. The dampers shall open prior to exhaust fan starting.

2.08 MISCELLANEOUS

A. Capillary Supports: securely support all duct mounted and casing mountedthermostat capillaries using factory fabricated copper bulb supports.

15955-5

B. Provide standoffs for control devices mounted on externally insulated ducts andequipment.

C. Anchor all items mounted on gypsum board (dry-wall) using toggle bolts or molybolts, not expansion shields.

D. Pressure Gauges:

1. Provide 1-1/2" dial branch pressure gauges as close as possible to each valveand damper operator. Provide 1" minimum dial gauge on each port of eachinstrument, including transmitters and P.E.'s.

2.09 SOFTWARE

A. Each direct digital controller shall contain all custom and standard programsnecessary to accomplish the sequence of operation specified for the equipment itserves and perform the energy management function specified in the Data andControl Summary.

B. All custom software to accomplish the sequence of control shall be generated in themanufacturer's local office and shall be tested and de-bugged prior to its installationat the job site. The DDC system shall provide a real time control language for userprogramming of HVAC application designed to accomplish easy transition fromhardware control system design to software based control system design. The customsoftware shall allow the user to program custom control sequences directly intomicro-computer memory. Provide a portable laptop computer with all softwareloaded and configured to control all devices through internet and direct connection.Provide a licensed backup copy of all software used in this project with settings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 FINAL ADJUSTMENT

Adjustments shall be performed by a factory trained technician to make all final controladjustments. The Temperature Control Contractor shall work closely with the Testing,Adjusting and Balancing contractor to troubleshoot and calibrate systems installed under thissection for proper operation and balance.

15955-6

3.02 TRAINING FOR OPERATION PERSONNEL

The Temperature Controls Contractor shall conduct suitable training period for the Owner'srepresentative to properly explain all facets of the control system operation.

3.03 ACCEPTANCE, GUARANTEE AND SERVICE

All components, parts, and assemblies shall be guaranteed against defects in workmanshipand materials per 01740. In addition, the Control Contractor shall provide preventionmaintenance, operator instruction, and system maintenance training through one (1) fullheating and cooling season.

END OF SECTION

15980-1

SECTION 15980

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Provide all labor, equipment and instrumentation necessary to perform the testing,adjusting and balancing (TAB) of heating, ventilating and air conditioning (HVAC)systems which shall include, but not be limited to:

1. Supply air systems

2. Return air systems (including plenum returns)

3. Exhaust air systems

4. Outside air

5. Mixed air

6. Adjustment of controls and equipment as required for proper operation ofsystems

7. Air leakage testing of ductwork

8. Heat transfer equipment

9. Adjust all systems to maintain building pressure design

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC)

B. National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB)

C. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers(ASHRAE)

D. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's Association (SMACNA)

15980-2

1.03 THE TAB AGENDA

A. The TAB Agenda Contractor shall prepare a TAB agenda for review and approval bythe Engineer. The TAB Agenda shall be provided during the submittal process. TheTAB Contractor shall not commence work until the TAB Agenda has been approvedby the Engineer.

B. The Agenda shall include the following detailed narrative procedures, systemdiagrams and forms for test results.

1. Specific standard procedures required and proposed for each system.Additional procedures for variable flow systems shall be developed by theTAB Contractor and included for review and approval.

2. Specific test forms for recording each TAB procedure and additional testforms for any variable flow systems shall be developed by the TABContractor and submitted for review and approval.

3. System diagrams for each air system. Diagrams may be single line. Inaddition to the information recorded for standard AABC or NEBBprocedures, report the following information:

a. Air handling units: Prepare profile and show design and actual CFM(outside air, return air, supply air). Measure and record each mode(minimum OA and 100% OA) where economizer cycle is specified.Record pressure drops of all components (coils, heat recoverydevices, filters, sound attenuators, louvers, dampers, fans) andcompare with design values. Pressure profile and componentpressure drops are performance indicators and are not to be used forflow measurements. Set and record purge air flow for heat recoverywheels. Record temperatures of outside air, return air, mixed air andsupply air.

b. Duct distribution systems: Prepare pressure profiles from the airhandling units to the extremities of the system. As a minimum, showpressures at each floor, main branch, and air flow measuring device.Make pitot tube traverses of all trunk lines and major branch lineswhere required for analysis of distribution system. Air flowmeasuring devices installed in ductwork may be utilized. Recordresidual pressures at inlet of volume controlled terminals at ends ofsystem. Show actual pressures at all static pressure control pointsutilized for constant or variable flow systems.

c. Variable flow systems: Include specific test forms provisions formeasuring and reporting CFM (supply, return, exhaust, outside),

15980-3

system pressures, motor loads, other pertinent data, at full unthrottledcapacity and at design (100 percent) flows. Record additional flow,pressure, and motor loads for supply and return/exhaust systemcapacities in 10 percent increments down to a minimum attainable bythe system to verify fan tracking and control. Modulate Systems byvarying the supply temperature of the medium or other approvedmeans.

4. Specific test forms for recording sound and vibration measurements.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. The TAB Contractor shall submit the following items prior to commencing work.All submittals shall be bound in a binder complete with cover sheet, index, and tabsseparating specific sections of the submittal.

1. The TAB agenda as detailed in paragraph 1.03-A

2. Warranty information

3. TAB Contractor qualifications including TAB Engineer and companyexperience on similar projects

4. Submit project supervisor and qualifications

5. Submit TAB equipment and last date of calibration

B. After completion of all TAB procedures and before warranty period commences,submit complete test reports as provided for by the prior approved TAB agenda, forEngineer review and approval. Where test results differ from specified designconditions, indicating a contract deficiency, include explanatory comments andpossible resolutions in the report. After review by the Engineer, the TAB Contractorshall make any adjustments deemed necessary by the Engineer.

C. Final report shall be submitted for acceptance and record. Submit six (6) copies offinal reports.

1.05 WARRANTY

A. For a period of one year after acceptance by the Owner, the TAB Contractor shall, atthe request of the Engineer, return to the project to retest and/or rebalance anyproblem areas. This shall be done within ten (10) working days at no additionalexpense to the Owner or the Engineer and shall be scheduled at final completion date.The purpose of this is to correct a problem, not to retest/rebalance revisions made bythe Owner.

15980-4

B. During the first year after acceptance by the Owner, the TAB Contractor shall returnto the project during the peak heating and cooling seasons to rebalance the applicablesystems to maintain the required discharge air temperatures. The T&B report shall beamended to reflect the results.

PART 2 - EQUIPMENT (NOT APPLICABLE)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. The TAB Contractor shall review and become thoroughly familiar with the job sitewhen the erection of the building is in the early stages. An additional visit shall bemade when the rough-in is complete. Prior to any closing in of ductwork and piping,verify that all fittings, dampers, control devices, test devices and valves are properlylocated and installed.

B. The TAB Contractor shall examine each distribution system to verify that it is freefrom obstructions. The TAB Contractor shall determine that all dampers, registersand valves are in a set or full open position; that moving equipment is lubricated; andthat the required filters are clean and functioning. The TAB Contractor shall requestthat the installing contractor perform air adjustments necessary for proper functioningof the system.

C. The TAB Contractor shall use test instruments that have been calibrated within atime period recommended by the manufacturer (no more than 6 months) and havebeen checked for accuracy prior of the start of the testing, adjusting and balancing.

D. The TAB Contractor shall verify that all equipment performs as designed andspecified. The TAB Contractor shall adjust all variable type drives, volume dampers,control dampers, balancing valves, control valves, etc., as required by the TAB work.

E. Coordinate TAB procedures with all construction requirements for the project so thatusable increments of finished work may be accepted for beneficial occupancy.Systems serving partially occupied phases of the project may require balancing foreach phase prior to final balancing.

F. Allow sufficient time in construction schedule for TAB prior to final inspection forthe project.

G. Conduct final TAB after system has been completed and is in full working order. Putall HVAC systems into full operation and continue operation of the systems during

15980-5

each working day of TAB. Accomplish TAB in accordance with the Agendaapproved by the Engineer.

3.02 AIR BALANCE

A. Place all interactive systems in operation with all filters installed and automaticcontrol systems completed and operating. Artificially load air filters by partialblanking or other means to produce air pressure drop midway between the clean anddirty condition. Set/reset room thermostats as necessary to check heating and coolingfunction, and maximum/minimum flow rates for factory set air terminal units andadjust units if not correct.

B. Balance systems to design ratings. Adjust fan speeds to provide design flows,including system diversities, at actual system pressures. Provide additional sheavesand belts as required to achieve design CFM. Coordinate VAV balancing, includingsupply and return fan volume controls, with the controls Contractor and set supplyfan static pressure control as low as practicable and still maintain required pressure atthe remote terminal units.

C. Make pilot tube traverses of all trunk lines and major branches when required todetermine proper proportioning of air flows. Air flow measuring devices, whereinstalled, may be utilized for this purpose.

D. Record pressure drop readings across all major system components and significantdrops within duct systems.

E. Adjust air systems with doors leading outside closed. Balance individual roomssimulating occupied conditions. (Windows and doors closed, etc.)

F. Log air flows for occupied and unoccupied conditions.

G. Make flow and pressure measurements at each terminal device, and each supply,return, or exhaust diffuser. Adjust each air outlet unit within plus or minus 10percent of design requirements, but total air for each system shall be not less thanshown. Adjust grilles and diffusers to minimize drafts in all areas. Maintain thebuilding pressure relationships between different zones.

H. Adjust outside air and return air quantities for all systems to within plus or minus 10percent. Total supply air quantity for any system shall be not less than shown.

I. Adjust exhaust systems to CFM requirements.

J. Test function of automatic dampers and operation of air terminal units. Check allcontrols for proper operation.

15980-6

3.03 HEAT TRANSFER EQUIPMENT DATA

A. For all heat transfer equipment, which for the purposes of this specification sectionshall include coils, etc.

The following data shall be measured and included in the TAB report:

1. Ambient conditions, dry bulb, wet bulb, relative humidity

2. Entering air wet bulb and dry bulb

3. Entering relative humidity

4. Leaving air we bulb and dry bulb

5. Leaving air relative humidity

6. Air pressure drops

3.04 AIR LEAKAGE TESTING OF DUCTWORK

A. Ductwork leakage shall be tested in accordance with SMACNA manual, "HVAC AirDuct Leakage Test Manual", latest edition.

3.05 VIBRATION TESTING

A. Furnish instruments and perform vibration measurements as specified in Section,NOISE VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL. Field vibration balancing isspecified in Section, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS. Providemeasurements for all rotating HVAC equipment 1/2 horsepower and larger, includingcentrifugal compressors, fans and motors.

B. Record initial and final measurements for each unit of equipment on test forms.Where vibration readings exceed the allowable tolerance and efforts to makecorrections have proved unsuccessful, forward a separate report to the Engineer.

3.07 SOUND TESTING

A. Perform and record required sound measurements in accordance with Paragraph,QUALITY ASSURANCE in Section, NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL. Takereadings in rooms, approximately ten percent of total rooms, designated by theEngineer.

B. Take measurements with a calibrated sound level meter and octave band analyzer ofthe accuracy required by AABC or NEBB.

15980-7

C. Sound reference levels, formulae and coefficients shall be according to ASHRAEHandbook, 1987 SYSTEMS AND APPLICATIONS Volume, Chapter, SOUNDAND VIBRATION CONTROL.

D. Determine compliance with specifications as follows:

1. Where sound pressure levels are specified, including the NC Criteria inSection, NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL.

a. Reduce the background noise as such as possible by shutting offunrelated audible equipment.

b. Measure octave band sound pressure levels with specified equipment"off".

c. Measure octave band pressure levels with specified equipment "on".

d. Use the DIFFERENCE in corresponding readings to determine thesound pressure due to equipment.

DIFFERENCE: 0 1 2 3 4 5 - 9 10 or moreFACTOR: 10 7 4 3 2 1 0

Sound pressure level due to equipment equals sound pressure levelwith equipment "on" minus FACTOR.

e. Plot octave bands of sound pressure level due to equipment fortypical rooms on a graph which also shows noise criteria (NC) curves.

2. When sound power levels are specified:

a. Perform steps 1.a. thru 1.d., as above.

b. For in equipment: Determine room attenuating effect, i.e., differencebetween sound power level and sound pressure level. Determinedsound power level will be the sum of sound pressure level due toequipment plus the room attenuating effect.

c. For outdoor equipment: Use directivity factor and distance fromnoise source to determine distance factor, i.e., difference betweensound power level and sound pressure level. Measured sound powerlevel will be the sum of sound pressure level due to equipment plusthe distance factor.

15980-8

3. Where sound pressure levels are specified in terms of dbA, measure soundlevels using the "A" scale of meter. Single value readings will be usedinstead of octave band analysis.

E. Where measured sound levels exceed specified level, the installing Contractor orequipment manufacturer shall take remedial action approved by the Engineer and thenecessary sound tests shall be repeated.

END OF SECTION

Date post:	10-Jul-2018
Category:	Documents
Upload:	trinhquynh
View:	217 times
Download:	0 times